HP 2/8q User guide

User Guide

HP

StorageWorks

2/8q Fibre Channel Switch

Management

First Edition (November 2004)

Part Number:

A7450–96007

This manual describes the management tools for the HP StorageWorks 2/8q Fibre Channel Switch

(2/8q FC Switch) that are included with the Modular Smart Array 1000 Small Business SAN.

Main sections of this guide include:

- Switch Manager User Interface

- Command Line Interface

© Copyright 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

Hewlett-Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

This document contains proprietary information, which is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Microsoft®, MS-DOS®, MS Windows®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Linux® is a U.S. registered trademard of Linus Torvalds.

Hewlett-Packard Company shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. The information is provided

“as is” without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Hewlett-Packard Company products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements for such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

HP StorageWorks 2/8q Fibre Channel Switch Management User Guide

First Edition (November 2004)

Part Number: A7450–96007

Contents

Contents

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Intended audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Related documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Document conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Text symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Equipment symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

HP installation and configuration assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

HP technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

HP storage web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

HP authorized reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

1 Switch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Installing Switch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Installing Switch Manager on Windows systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Installing Switch Manager on Linux systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Starting Switch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Exiting Switch Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Removing Switch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Removing Switch Manager from Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Removing Switch Manager from Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Changing the encryption key for the default fabric view file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Saving and opening fabric view files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Setting Switch Manager preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Using online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Viewing software version and copyright information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Using the Switch Manager user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Menu bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Topology display menu bar options and shortcut keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Faceplate display menu bar options and shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Fabric tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Graphic window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Data window and tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31


3

Contents

4

Working status indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Using the topology display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Switch status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Topology data windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Working with switches and links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Selecting switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Arranging switches in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Opening the topology display menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Using the faceplate display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Port views and status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Faceplate data windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Working with ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Selecting ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Opening the Faceplate menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Managing fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Managing fabric security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

User account security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Fabric services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Enabling SNMP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Enabling In-band Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Managing the fabric database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Adding a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Removing a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Opening a fabric view file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Saving a fabric view file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Rediscovering a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Adding a new switch to a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Replacing a failed switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Deleting switches and links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Deleting a switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Deleting a link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Displaying fabric information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Fabric status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Event Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Displaying the Event Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Filtering the Event Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Sorting the Event Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Saving the Event Browser to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Active Zoneset data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Zoning a fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Zoning concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Soft Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Hard Zoning (ACL Zoning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Aliases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Zone sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Zoning database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Zoning configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Using the Zoning Config dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Interop Auto Save parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48


Contents

Default Visibility parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Restoring default zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Merging fabrics and zoning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Zone merge failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Zone Merge failure recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Using the Edit Zoning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Managing zone sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Creating a zone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Activating and deactivating a zone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Copying a zone to a zone set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Removing a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Removing a zone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Removing all zoning definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Managing zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Creating a zone in a zone set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Adding zone members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Creating a member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Renaming a zone or a zone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Removing a zone member. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Removing a zone from a zone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Removing a zone from all zone sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Changing zone types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Managing aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Creating an alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Adding a member to an alias. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Removing an alias from all zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Saving the Zoning Database to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Managing switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Managing user accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Creating user accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Removing a user account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Changing a user account password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Modifying a user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Displaying switch information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Name Server data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Switch data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Link data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Port Statistics data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Port Information data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Configured Zonesets data windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Configuring port threshold alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Exporting name server information to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Paging a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Setting the date/time and NTP client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Resetting a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Configuring a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Configuration wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Switch properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Symbolic Name parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Administrative State parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70


5

Contents

6

Domain ID and Domain ID Lock parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Broadcast Support parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

In-band Management parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Interop Mode parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Legacy Address Format parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Timeout Values parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Network properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

IP Configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

SNMP Configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

SNMP Trap Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Remote Logging parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Archiving a switch configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Restoring a switch configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Restoring the factory default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Downloading a support file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Installing firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Displaying hardware status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Managing ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Displaying port information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Port status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Displaying port types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Displaying port operational states. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Displaying port speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Displaying transceiver media status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Port Statistics data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Port Information data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Name Server data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Configuring ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Port States parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Port Speed parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Port Type parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Interoperability Credits parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

I/O Stream Guard parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Device Scan parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Changing the port symbolic name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Extending port credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Resetting a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Testing ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Graphing port performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Starting HP StorageWorks Fabric View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Exiting HP StorageWorks Fabric View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Saving and opening Fabric View files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Changing the Default Fabric View File encryption key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Setting HP StorageWorks Fabric View preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Setting the polling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Displaying graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Removing graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Arranging graphs in the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Customizing graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Printing graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96


Contents

Rescaling a selected graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Saving graph statistics to a file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Interpreting Switch Manager messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Fabrics File—Open, Save messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Add a Fabric messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Network Properties dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Switch Properties dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Port Properties dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Faceplate display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Load Firmware dialog box messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Port Loopback Test dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Extended Credits wizard messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Zoning dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Restore Configuration dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Save Fabric View dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Trap Configuration dialog box messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

2 Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Logging on to a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Working with user accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Working with switch configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Modifying a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Backing up a switch configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Restoring a switch configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Admin

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Alias

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Config

command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Create Support command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Date

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123


7

Contents

8

Firmware Install

command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Hardreset

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Help

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

History

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Hotreset

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Image

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Lip

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Passwd

command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Ping

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Ps

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Quit

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131


Contents

Reset

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Set

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Set Config

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Set Log

Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Set Port

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Set Setup

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Show

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

Show Config

command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Show Log

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

Show Perf

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Show Setup

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166


9

Contents

10

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

Shutdown

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Test

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Uptime

command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

User

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Whoami

command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Syntx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Zone

Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Zoneset

command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Syntx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Zoning

command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Figures

1 Initial Startup Dialog—Switch Manager dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2 Save Default Fabric View File dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3 Load Default Fabric View File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

4 Preferences dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24


Contents

5 Switch Manager Topology window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

6 Switch Manager Faceplate window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

7 Topology display menu bar options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

8 Faceplate display menu bar options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

9 Fabric tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

10 Topology display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

11 Faceplate display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

12 Add a New Fabric dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

13 Event Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

14 Filter Events dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

15 Active Zoneset data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

16 Zoning Config dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

17 Edit Zoning dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

18 User Account Administration dialog box – Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

19 User Account Administration dialog box – Remove Account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

20 User Account Administration dialog box – Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

21 User Account Administration dialog box—Modify Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

22 Faceplate display—Switch data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

23 Configured Zonesets data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

24 Port Threshold Alarm Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

25 Port Threshold Alarm example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

26 Switch Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

27 Network Properties dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

28 Restore dialog boxes – Full and Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

29 Hardware status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

30 Faceplate Display – Port Information data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

31 Port Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

32 Designating donor ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

33 Port Loopback Test dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

34 Fabric View graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

35 Save Default Fabric View File dialog box – HP StorageWorks Fabric View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

36 Load Default Fabric File dialog box – HP StorageWorks Fabric View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

37 Preferences – HP StorageWorks Fabric View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

38 Default Graph Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Tables

1 Document conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2 Management system requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

3 Topology display shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

4 Faceplate display shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

5 Tool bar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

6 Topology display switch and status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

7 Event severity levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

8 Edit Zoning dialog box tool bar buttons and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

9 Factory Supplied User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

10 Name Server data window entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

11 Switch data window entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

12 Switch resets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

13 Switch administrative states. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

14 Timeout values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72


11

Contents

15 IP configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

16 SNMP Configuration parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

17 SNMP trap configuration parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

18 Factory default configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

19 Port type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

20 Port operational states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

21 Port speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

22 Port/transceiver states. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

23 Port Statistics data window entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

24 Port Information data window entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

25 Port states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

26 Port speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

27 Port types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

28 Fabrics file—Open, Save messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

29 Add a Fabric messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

30 Network Properties dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

31 Switch Properties dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

32 Port Properties dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

33 Faceplate display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

34 Load Firmware dialog box messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

35 Port Loopback test dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

36 Extended Credits wizard messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

37 Zoning dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

38 Restore Configuration dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

39 Save Fabric View dialog box messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

40 Trap Configuration dialog box messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

41 Workstation port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

42 Predefined user accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

43 Command line completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

44 Commands listed by Authority Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

45 Switch configuration default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

46 Port configuration default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

47 Port threshold alarm configuration default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

48 Zoning configuration default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

49 SNMP configuration default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

50 System configuration default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

51 Set Config port parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

52 Set config switch parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

53 Set config threshold parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

54 Set config zoning parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

55 SNMP configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

56 System configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

57 Show Port parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

58 Zoning limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

12


About This Guide

About this Guide

the HP StorageWorks 2/8q Fibre Channel Switch (2/8q FC Switch):

About this Guide

■

Switch Manager

■

Command Line Interface (CLI)

“About This Guide” topics include:

■

■

■

Overview , page 14

Conventions , page 15

Getting help , page 17


13

About this Guide

Overview

This section covers the following topics:

■

■

Intended audience

Related documentation

Intended audience

This book is intended for use by the system administrator responsible for the MSA1000 storage system.

Related documentation

The following MSA1000 SAN and 2/8q FC Switch documents are on the MSA1000 Small

Business SAN and HA Documentation CD:

■

■

HP StorageWorks Modular Smart Array 1000 Small Business SAN Kit Installation

Instructions (also printed)

HP StorageWorks 2/8q Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide

■

■

HP StorageWorks 2/8q Fibre Channel Switch Simple Network Management Protocol

Reference Guide

HP StorageWorks 2/8q Fibre Channel Switch Event Messages Reference Guide

The following MSA1000-specific documents are on the MSA1000 documentation CD:

■

■

■

HP StorageWorks MSA1000 Configuration Overview

HP StorageWorks MSA1000 Installation Guide

HP StorageWorks Modular Smart Array 1000 Maintenance and Service Guide

■

■

■

HP StorageWorks Modular Smart Array 1000/1500 cs Command Line Interface User

Guide

HP StorageWorks Modular Smart Array 1000 Controller Reference Guide

HP Array Configuration Utility User Guide

14


About this Guide

Conventions

Conventions consist of the following:

■

■

■

Document conventions

Text symbols

Equipment symbols

Document conventions

This document follows the conventions in Table 1 .

Table 1: Document conventions

Element

Cross-reference links

Menu items, buttons, keys, tabs, and user input in a graphical interface. (Use plain text for all other GUI elements.)

Text emphasis and document titles (not

CD titles) in body text

Command-line user input, commands, code, device instances, file and directory names, and system responses

(output and messages)

Command-line and code variables

Web site addresses

Convention

Blue text: Figure 1

Bold

Italics

Monospace font

Monospace, italic font

Blue underlined sans serif font text

( http://www.hp.com

)

Text symbols

The following symbols may be found in the text of this guide. They have the following meanings:

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions in the warning could result in bodily harm or death.

Caution: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.

Note: Text set off in this manner presents commentary, sidelights, or interesting points of information.


15

About this Guide

Equipment symbols

The following equipment symbols may be found on hardware for which this guide pertains.

They have the following meanings:

Any enclosed surface or area of the equipment marked with these symbols indicates the presence of electrical shock hazards. Enclosed area contains no operator serviceable parts.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock hazards, do not open this enclosure.

Any RJ-45 receptacle marked with these symbols indicates a network interface connection.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug telephone or telecommunications connectors into this receptacle.

Any surface or area of the equipment marked with these symbols indicates the presence of a hot surface or hot component. Contact with this surface could result in injury.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Power supplies or systems marked with these symbols indicate the presence of multiple sources of power.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury from electrical shock, remove all power cords to completely disconnect power from the power supplies and systems.

Any product or assembly marked with these symbols indicates that the component exceeds the recommended weight for one individual to handle safely.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the equipment, observe local occupational health and safety requirements and guidelines for manually handling material.

16


About this Guide

Getting help

If you still have a question after reading this guide, contact an HP Authorized Service Provider or access the following HP web site: http://www.hp.com

.

Note: HP call centers use product and serial numbers to validate warranty entitlement. Most HP products can provide product number, serial number and firmware revision electronically through the use of supplied management or diagnostic utilities, eliminating the need to physically inspect or remove products from installed enclosures. You may be directed by HP to run these utilities to gather required entitlement information.

HP installation and configuration assistance

A moderate level of SAN-related knowledge is required to successfully install this product. If you are not familiar with installing and configuring storage array systems in a SAN, HP can install it for you.

For more information, access the following HP web site: http://www.hp.com/hps/storage/ns_implementation.html

.

Depending on your needs, different levels of assistance are available.

For example, the HP Installation and Startup for HP StorageWorks Disk Arrays Service

Package includes:

■

Physical installation of the MSA

■

■

■

■

■

Virtual disk design and configuration of the MSA

Service planning

Service deployment

Installation Verification Testing (IVT)

Customer orientation


17

About this Guide

HP technical support

Telephone numbers for worldwide technical support are listed on the following HP web site: http://www.hp.com/support/

. From this web site, select the country of origin.

Note: For continuous quality improvement, calls may be recorded or monitored.

Be sure to have the following information available before calling:

■

■

Technical support registration number (if applicable)

Product serial numbers

■

■

■

■

Product model names and numbers

Applicable error messages

Operating system type and revision level

Detailed, specific questions

HP storage web site

The latest information on this product, as well as the latest drivers, are available on the following HP web site: http://www.hp.com/country/us/eng/prodserv/storage.html

. From this web site, select the appropriate product or solution.

HP authorized reseller

For the name of your nearest HP Authorized Reseller:

■

■

■

In the United States, call 1-800-345-1518

In Canada, call 1-800-263-5868

Elsewhere, see the HP web site for locations and telephone numbers: http://www.hp.com

.

18


Switch Manager

1

This chapter describes how to use the Switch Manager application and its menus, including:

■

Getting started , page 20

■

■

Managing fabrics , page 35

Managing switches , page 58

■

■

■

Managing ports , page 80

Graphing port performance , page 91

Interpreting Switch Manager messages , page 97


19

Switch Manager

Getting started

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Installing Switch Manager , page 20

Starting Switch Manager , page 21

Exiting Switch Manager , page 22

Removing Switch Manager , page 23

Changing the encryption key for the default fabric view file , page 23

Saving and opening fabric view files , page 23

Setting Switch Manager preferences , page 24

Using online help , page 25

Viewing software version and copyright information , page 25

Using the Switch Manager user interface , page 25

Using the topology display , page 31

Using the faceplate display , page 33

Installing Switch Manager

Switch Manager is installed during the initial set up and installation of the MSA1000 Small

Business SAN. If Switch Manager is not installed on your system, first verify that your workstation or server meets the following minimum system requirements. (

Table 2 )

Table 2: Management system requirements

Item

Operating system

Memory

Disk space

Processor

Hardware

Internet browser

Minimum Requirements

Windows® 2000/2003 32-bit operating systems

Linux® Red Hat 32-bit operating systems

256 MB

150 MB, per installation

300 MHz

CD-ROM drive, RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 Ethernet port

Windows: Microsoft® Internet Explorer®

Linux: Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later, or Mozilla 1.0.2 or later with Personal Security Manager

Installing Switch Manager on Windows systems

1. Close all programs currently running, and then insert the Small Business SAN Software

CD into the server or management workstation CD-ROM drive.

The CD automatically starts, and displays the HP Small Business SAN Wizard.

2. In the Welcome window, click Next, and then follow the onscreen instructions.

Note: Switch Manager is installed and placed in the following system folder:

C:\Program Files\HP\HP_StorageWorks_Switch_Manager

.

20


Switch Manager

Installing Switch Manager on Linux systems

1. Close all programs currently running, and then insert the Small Business SAN Software

CD into the server or management workstation CD-ROM drive.

The CD auto-mounts, and executes an installation script.

If the CD does not auto-mount, mount the CD and execute the HP Small Business Linux

Wizard script from the

/linux

directory. ( install_smb.sh

)

2. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.

Starting Switch Manager

For Windows systems, do one of the following:

■

■

Double-click the Switch Manager shortcut icon

Select Start > Switch Manager

■

Enter the following at the command line:

<install_directory>Switch_Manager.exe

For Linux systems, because the installation script creates a symbolic link between

/opt/HP/HP_StorageWorks_Switch_Manager/Switch_Manager

and

/usr/sbin/Switch_Manager

, enter the following at the command line:

# Switch_Manager

The application opens with the Initial Start Dialog—Switch Manager dialog box ( Figure 1 ). If

you prefer not to see this dialog box, check the Don’t show this dialog again option. This has

the same effect as disabling the Display Initial Startup Dialog preference. See “ Setting Switch

Manager preferences ” on page 24 for more information.

Figure 1: Initial Startup Dialog—Switch Manager dialog box

The following options are available from this initial dialog box:

■

■

Open Configuration Wizard—Opens the wizard to configure a switch, add a new switch, replace/restore a switch, or recover or edit an IP configuration of an existing

switch. See “ Configuration wizard ” on page 69.

Open existing fabric (requires ip address, login, and password—Opens the Add a New

Fabric dialog box, which prompts you for a fabric name, IP address, account name, and

password. See “ Adding a fabric ” on page 36.


21

Switch Manager

■

■

Open existing fabric view file—Opens the Open View dialog box which prompts you to

specify a fabric view file that you saved earlier. See “ Opening a fabric view file ” on page 37.

Start application without specifying a fabric—Opens the Switch Manager window.

Exiting Switch Manager

To exit a Switch Manager application session:

1. Select File > Exit.

If you have not yet defined an encryption key, the Save Default Fabric View File dialog box (

Figure 2 ) is displayed and prompts you to save the current fabric view as the default

fabric view file.

Figure 2: Save Default Fabric View File dialog box

2. Enter the encryption key information in the Default Fabric View File Encryption Key box.

3. Re-enter the encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption Key to Confirm box.

4. Click OK to save the current set of fabrics to the default fabric view file in the working directory.

The encryption key is used to encrypt the sensitive data in the default fabric view file. See

“ Changing the encryption key for the default fabric view file” on page 23 for more

information.

If an encryption key has been defined and the View File Auto Save and Load preferences setting to is set to Enable, the current fabric view is automatically saved to your default fabric view file upon exiting future Switch Manager sessions.

To prevent Switch Manager from prompting you to save the default fabric view file between

Switch Manager sessions, set the View File Auto Save and Load preferences setting to Enable

(default). See “ Setting Switch Manager preferences ” on page 24 for more information.

In your next Switch Manager session, the Load Default Fabric View File dialog box (

Figure 3 )

prompts you to load the default fabric view file and to specify its encryption key, if there is one. If you do not want to load the default fabric view file, click Continue Without Loading to open the Switch Manager with no fabric displayed.

22

Figure 3: Load Default Fabric View File dialog box


Switch Manager

Removing Switch Manager

Removing Switch Manager from Windows

To remove Switch Manager from Windows:

1. Browse for and change to the installation directory:

The default directory is

C:\Program Files\HP\HP_StorageWorks_Switch_Manager

.

2. Double-click the uninstall program file or shortcut/link, and then follow the onscreen instructions to remove Switch Manager.

Removing Switch Manager from Linux

To remove Switch Manager from Linux:

1. Browse for and change to the installation directory.

The default directory is

/opt/HP/HP_StorageWorks_Switch_Manager

.

2. Enter the following command:

# Uninstall_HP_StorageWorks_Switch_Manager

Changing the encryption key for the default fabric view file

To change the encryption key for the Switch Manager default fabric view file:

1. Select File > Save Default Fabric View File.

2. Enter an encryption key in the Default Fabric File Encryption Key box.

3. Re-enter the same encryption key in the confirmation box.

4. Click OK to save the current set of fabrics to the default fabric view file in the working directory.

Saving and opening fabric view files

A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file. In addition to the Switch Manager default fabric view file, you can save and open your own fabric view files.

To save a set of fabrics to a file:

1. Select File > Save View As. The Save View dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter a name for the fabric file or click Browse to select an existing file.

Files are saved in the working directory.

3. Enter a password in the File Password box.

When opening this fabric file, a password is required. If the File Password box is left blank, no password is required when attempting to open this fabric file.

4. Click OK.

To open a fabric view file:

1. Select File > Open View File. The Open View dialog box is displayed.


3. Enter a password in the File Password box.

4. Click OK.


23

Switch Manager

Setting Switch Manager preferences

Using the preferences settings to:

■

■

Change the location of the working directory in which to save files.

Change the location of the browser used to view the online help.

■

■

■

■

Choose the fabric discovery interval. The fabric discovery interval is how often the Switch

Manager application receives information from the fabric. Choose 30 (default), 45, or 60 seconds. The smaller the interval, the more often the application talks to the switch and thus the greater impact to performance.

Enable (default) or disable the view file auto save and load feature. See “ Exiting Switch

Manager ” on page 22 for more information on the default fabric view file.

Enable (default) or disable the use of the Initial Start Dialog—Switch Manager dialog box

at the beginning of a Switch Manager session. See “ Starting Switch Manager” on page 21

for information about the Initial Start Dialog—Switch Manager dialog box. After a default fabric view file is created, this setting has no effect.

Enable (default) or disable the Event Browser. See the “ Event Browser ” on page 41. If the

Event Browser is enabled using the Preferences dialog box, the next time Switch Manager is started, all events from the switch alarm log is displayed. If the Event Browser is disabled when Switch Manager is started and later enabled, only those events from the time the Event Browser was enabled and forward are displayed.

■

Choose the default port view when opening the faceplate display. You can set the faceplate to reflect the current port type (default), port speed, port operational state, or port transceiver media. Regardless of the default port view you choose, you can change the port view in the faceplate display by opening the View menu and then selecting a different

port view option. See “Port status” on page 80 for more information.

To set preferences for your Switch Manager sessions:

1. Select File > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed (

Figure 4

).

24

Figure 4: Preferences dialog box

2. Enter or browse for paths to the working directory and browser.

3. Select the preferences you want in the Application-wide Options area.

4. Click OK.


Switch Manager

Using online help

Online help is available for the Switch Manager application and its functions.

You can do one of the following to open the online help file:

■

Select Help > Help Topics.

■

■

Click Help on the tool bar.

Click Help in a dialog box to display context-sensitive help for all Switch Manager dialog boxes.

Viewing software version and copyright information

To view Switch Manager software version and copyright information:

1. Select Help > About.

2. Click OK when you are finished.

Using the Switch Manager user interface

The Switch Manager application uses two basic displays to manage the fabric and individual switches; the topology display (

Figure 5

) and the faceplate display ( Figure 6 ). The topology

display shows all switches that are able to communicate. The faceplate display shows the front of a single switch and its ports.

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

Menu bars

Tool bar

Fabric tree

Figure 5: Switch Manager Topology window

4

5

6

Graphic window

Data window and tabs

Working status indicator


6

25

Switch Manager

3

1

2

4

Menu bars

5

1

2

3

Menu bars

Tool bar

Fabric tree

4

5

6

Figure 6: Switch Manager Faceplate window

Graphic window



6

In addition to the menu bar, both the topology and faceplate displays have context sensitive menus that pop up when you right-click in the graphic window. The menus and the options offered in them vary depending on the display. For example, the Port menu and many of the

Switch menu selections are available only in the faceplate display.

See

Figure 7 and

Figure 8 for example menu bar options for the topology and faceplate

displays.

See “ Opening the topology display menus

” on page 33 and “ Opening the Faceplate menu ” on page 34 for information about accessing these displays.

26


Topology display menu bar options and shortcut keys

Switch Manager

Figure 7: Topology display menu bar options

Table 3: Topology display shortcut keys

Shortcut

Ctrl+O

Alt+F, O

Alt+F, A

Selection

File>Open View File

File>Save View As

Shortcut

Alt+S, E

Alt+S, P

Alt+F, D File>Save Default Fabric

View File

File>Preferences

Alt+S, N

Alt+F, R Alt+W, C

Alt+F, X

Alt+B, A

Alt+B, R

Alt+B, D

Alt+B, T

Alt+B, E

File>Exit

Fabric>Add Fabric

Fabric>Remove Fabric

Fabric>Rediscover Fabric

Alt+V, R

F5

Alt+V, L

Alt+V, A

Alt+V, M

Fabric>Start Fabric View Alt+H, H

Fabric>Show Event Browser Alt+H, A

Alt+S, D Switch>Delete

Shortcut key combinations are not case-sensitive.

Selection

Switch>Export Name Server

Switch>Switch Properties

(active only when one switch is selected)

Switch>Network properties

(active only when one switch is selected)

Wizards>Configuration

Wizard

View>Refresh

View>Layout Topology

View>Toggle Auto Layout

View>Remember Layout

Help>Help Topics

Help>About


27

Switch Manager

Faceplate display menu bar options and shortcut keys

28

Alt+F, D

Alt+F, R

Alt+F, X

Alt+B, A

Alt+B, R

Alt+B, E

Alt+S, A

Alt+S, R

Alt+S, U

Alt+S, D

Figure 8: Faceplate display menu bar options

Table 4: Faceplate display shortcut keys

Shortcut

Ctrl+O

Alt+F, O

Selection

File>Open View File

Alt+F, A File>Save View As

Shortcut

Alt+S, E

+R

+A

Alt+S, S

File>Save Default Fabric

View File

File>Preferences

File>Exit

Fabric>Add Fabric

Fabric>Remove Fabric

Alt+S, W

Alt+P, R

Alt+P, N

Alt+P, T

Alt+P, L

Fabric>Show Event Browser Alt+Z, E

Switch>Archive Alt+Z, C

Switch>Restore

Switch>User Accounts

Switch>Set Date/Time

Alt+Z, A

Alt+Z, D

Alt+Z, R

Alt+S, O Switch>Switch Properties Alt+W, C

Alt+S, N

Alt+S, G

Switch>Network Properties

Switch>Toggle Beacon

Alt+W, E

Alt+V, R

F5

Alt+H, H Alt+S, C Switch>Port Threshold

Alarm Configuration

Alt+S, L Switch>Load Firmware

Shortcut key combinations are not case-sensitive.

Alt+H, A

Selection

Switch>Reset Switch|

Reset

Hard Reset

Switch> Restore Factory

Defaults

Switch>Download Support

File

Port>Port Properties

Port>Port Symbolic Name

Port>Reset Port

Port>Port Loopback Test

Zoning>Edit Zoning

Zoning>Edit Zoning Config

Zoning>Activate Zone Set

Zoning>Deactivate Zone Set

Zoning>Restore Default

Zoning

Wizards>Configuration

Wizard

Wizards>Ext Credit Wizard

View>Refresh

Help>Help Topics

Help>About


Switch Manager

Tool bar

The tool bar consists of a row of graphical buttons that are used to access Switch Manager functions (

Table 5

). Tool bar buttons are an alternative method to using the menu bar. The tool bar can be relocated in the display by clicking and dragging the handle at the left edge of the tool bar.

Table 5: Tool bar buttons

Button Description

Add Fabric—Adds a new fabric to the fabric view.

Open View File—Opens an existing fabric view file.

Save View As—Saves the current fabric view to a file.

Refresh—Updates the topology or faceplate display with the current information.

Event Browser—Opens the event browser.

Help Topics—Opens the online help file.

Edit Zoning—Opens the Edit Zoning dialog box (available only in the faceplate display).

Fabric tree

The fabric tree lists the managed fabrics and their switches ( Figure 9

). The window width can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the moveable window border. An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded or collapsed. Click this handle or double-click the entry to expand or collapse a fabric tree entry. A fabric entry expands to show its member switches.


29

Switch Manager

2

1

3

1

2

Fabric entry

Entry handle

Figure 9: Fabric tree

3

Switch entries

Each fabric tree entry has a small icon next to it that uses color to indicate operational status.

■

■

■

■

A green icon indicates normal operation.

A yellow icon indicates that a switch is operational, but may require attention to maintain maximum performance.

A red icon indicates a potential failure or non-operational state (if switch is offline).

A blue icon indicates that a switch is unknown, unreachable, or unmanageable.

If the status of the fabric is not normal, the fabric icon in the fabric tree indicates the reason for the abnormal status. The same message is provided when you rest the mouse over the fabric icon in the fabric tree.

The fabric tree provides access to the topology and faceplate displays for any fabric or switch.

■

■

To open the topology display from the fabric tree, click a fabric entry.

To open the faceplate display from the fabric tree, click a switch entry.

Graphic window

The graphic window (

Figure 6 ), presents graphic information about fabrics and switches such

as the fabric topology and the switch faceplate. The window height can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the window border that it shares with the data window. This only works when displaying a fabric.

30


Switch Manager


The data window presents a table of data and statistics associated with the selected tab.

(

Figure 6 .) Use the scroll bar to browse through the data. The window length can be adjusted

by clicking and dragging the border that it shares with the graphic window.

Adjust the column width by moving the pointer over the column heading border shared by two columns until a right/left arrow graphic is displayed. Click and drag the arrow to the desired width.

The data window tabs present options for the type of information to display in the data window. These options vary depending on the display.


The working status indicator, located in the lower right corner of the Switch Manager window

(

Figure 6 ), shows when the management workstation is exchanging information with the

fabric. As conditions change, the fabric forwards this information to the management system where it is reflected in the various displays.

Using the topology display

The topology display (

Figure 10 ) receives information from the selected fabric and displays its

topology. Switches appear in the graphic window and use color to indicate status. Consider the following topology display features:

■

Switch status

■

■

Topology data windows

Working with switches and links

Figure 10: Topology display


31

Switch Manager

32

Switch status

Switch icon shape and color provide information about the switch and its operational state.

Lines represent links between switches. The topology display uses green to indicate normal operation, yellow to indicate operational with errors, red to indicate a potential failure or non-operational state, and blue to indicate unknown, unreachable, or unmanageable. See

“ Fabric status ” on page 40 for more information about topology display icons.

Topology data windows

The topology display provides the following data windows, which correspond to the data window tabs at the bottom of the display:

■

■

■

■

Name Server—Displays all devices logged with the name server and their addresses

within the current fabric configuration. See “ Name Server data window ” on page 63 for

more information.

Active Zoneset—Displays the active zone set for the fabric including zones and their

member ports. See “ Active Zoneset data window ” on page 44 for more information about

this data window. See “ Zoning a fabric ” on page 45 for information about zone sets and

zones.

Switch—Displays current network and switch configuration data for the selected

switches. See “ Switch data window ” on page 63 for more information.

Link—Displays information about the inter-switch links. See “ Link data window ” on page 64 to for more information.

Working with switches and links

Switch and link icons are selectable and moveable, and serve as access points for other displays and menus. You select switches and links to display information about them, modify their configuration, or delete them from the display. Context-sensitive menus are displayed when right-clicking on a switch or link icon, or in the background of the topology display graphic window.

Selecting switches

Selected switch icons are highlighted in light blue. Select switches in the following ways:

■

To select a switch, click the icon.

■

■

■

To select multiple switches, hold down Ctrl and select.

To select all switches, right-click anywhere in the graphic window background. Select

Select All Switches from the menu.

To cancel a selection, hold down Ctrl and select the item again. To cancel all selections, click in the graphic window background.

Arranging switches in the display

You can arrange switch icons in the topology display:

■

■

To move an individual switch icon, click and drag the icon to another location in the graphic window. Links stretch or contract to remain connected.

To arrange all switch icons in the topology display automatically, select View > Layout

Topology.

By default, the Toggle Auto Layout box in the View menu is checked, which causes Switch

Manager to arrange the icons when Layout Topology is selected.


Switch Manager

You can save a custom arrangement, or layout, and restore that layout during a Switch

Manager session. Begin by arranging the icons, and then select View > Remember Layout.

To restore the saved layout, select View > Toggle Auto Layout box, and then select Layout

Topology.

Opening the topology display menus

The faceplate display shows the front of a single switch and its ports. To open the faceplate display when viewing the topology display, click the switch entry/icon in the fabric tree, or double-click the switch graphic.

The topology display also offers a Fabric, Switch, and Link menu:

■

■

■

To open the Fabric menu, right-click the graphic window background. The Fabric menu presents selections to refresh the fabric, select all switches, select all links, or layout topology.

To open the Switch menu, right-click the switch icon in the graphic window. The Switch menu presents selections to refresh the switch, delete the switch from the display, open the

Switch Properties dialog box, and open the Network Properties dialog box.

To open the Link menu, right-click the link. The Link menu presents a selection to delete the link from the display.

Using the faceplate display

The faceplate display ( Figure 11 ) displays the switch name and operational state, and port

status.

Figure 11: Faceplate display

Port views and status

Port color and text provide information about the port and its operational state. Green indicates active; gray indicates inactive. The faceplate display provides views of port status corresponding to the View menu options in the faceplate display. See

“Port status” on page 80

for more information about these displays.

Displayed port information includes the port type, state, speed, and media.


33

Switch Manager

34

Context-sensitive menus are displayed when you right-click on the faceplate image or on a port icon in the faceplate display.

Faceplate data windows

The faceplate display provides the following data windows, which correspond to the data window tabs at the bottom of the display:

■

Name Server—Displays all devices connected to the switch that are logged with the name server.

■

■

Switch—Displays current switch configuration data.

Port Statistics—Displays performance data for the selected ports.

■

■

Port Information—Displays information for the selected ports.

Configured Zonesets—Displays all zone sets, zones, and zone membership in the zoning database.

Working with ports

Ports are selectable and serve as access points for other displays and menus. Select ports to display information about them in the data window or to modify them. Context-sensitive menus are displayed when right-clicking the faceplate image or on a port icon in the faceplate display.

Selecting ports

You can select ports in the following ways. Selected ports are outlined in white.

■

To select a port, click the port in the faceplate display.

■

■

■

■

To select a range of consecutive ports, select a port, and then press and hold Shift and select another port. The application selects both end ports and all ports in between in port number sequence.

To select several non-consecutive ports, hold Ctrl while selecting.

To select all ports, right-click on the faceplate image. and then select Select All Ports from the menu.

To cancel a selection, press and hold Ctrl and select it again.

Opening the Faceplate menu

To open the Faceplate menu, right-click on the faceplate image to present the following tasks:

■

Refresh the switch

■

Select all ports

■

■

■

Manage switch properties

Manage network properties

Extended credits wizard

■

■

■

Manage port properties

Change the port symbolic name

Run the port loopback tests

If no ports are selected, the port-related tasks is unavailable in the menu. Right-click a port to open the Port menu. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl to select more than one port. If multiple ports are selected, right-click on one of the selected ports.


Switch Manager

Managing fabrics

This section describes the following tasks that manage fabrics:

■

■

Managing fabric security , page 35

Managing the fabric database , page 36

■

■

Displaying fabric information , page 40

Zoning a fabric , page 45

Managing fabric security

The components of Fibre Channel fabric security are:

■

■

User account security

Fabric services

Note: HP does not support Inter-Switch Links (ISLs), also known as E-Ports, between two or more switches. There should be no fiber cables joining two or more switches together. This is not a supported configuration. If they are connected, remove the link. The features relating to the use of

ISLs—specifically Interop AutoSave, Interop Mode, Inband Management, and Legacy

Addressing—are left in this User Guide for completeness, but are not supported by HP.

User account security

User account security is the process by which your user account and password are authenticated with the list of valid user accounts and passwords. The switch validates your account and password when you attempt to add a fabric using Switch Manager or log into a switch through Telnet. The system administrator defines accounts, passwords, and authority

levels that are stored on the switch. See “ Displaying switch information ” on page 62 for more

information.

The Admin account possesses Admin authority which grants full access to all tasks of the

Switch Manager menu system. The switch validates your user account and Switch Manager grants access to its menus according to your authority level. If you do not have Admin authority, you are limited to monitoring tasks.

Note: If a user is logged into a switch using Switch Manager or CLI, and an administrator changes user access rights or passwords, existing logins are not affected by the new settings. Login access and privileges are only checked for a new login request.


35

Switch Manager

Fabric services

Fabric services security includes SNMP and In-band management.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the protocol governing network management and monitoring of network devices. SNMP security consists of a read community string and a write community string, which are basically the passwords that control read and write access to the switch. The read community string (“public”) and write community string

(“private”) are set at the factory defaults and should be changed if SNMP is enabled using the

Network Properties dialog box. If SNMP is enabled (default) and the read and write community strings have not been changed from their defaults, you risk unwanted access to the

switch. See “ Enabling SNMP configuration ” on page 36 for more information. SNMP is

enabled by default.

In-band management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links using Switch

Manager, SNMP, management server. The switch comes from the factory with in-band management enabled. If you disable in-band management on a particular switch, you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct Ethernet or serial

connection. See “ Enabling In-band Management ” on page 36 for more information. In-band

management in not supported at this time.

Enabling SNMP configuration

1. Open the faceplate display, and then select Switch > Network Properties. The Network

Properties dialog box is displayed.

2. Select SNMP Enabled in the SNMP Configuration area.

3. Click OK.

Enabling In-band Management

1. Open the faceplate display, and then select Switch > Switch Properties. The Switch

Properties dialog box is displayed.

2. Select In-band Management Enable.

3. Click OK.

Managing the fabric database

A fabric database contains the set of fabrics that you have added during a Switch Manager session. Initially, if you do not open an existing fabric or fabric view file, the Switch Manager application opens with an empty fabric database.

Adding a fabric

To add a fabric to the database:

1. Select Fabric > Add Fabric. The Add a New Fabric dialog box is displayed (

Figure 12 ).

36


Switch Manager

Figure 12: Add a New Fabric dialog box

2. Enter a fabric name (optional) and the IP address of the switch through which to manage the fabric.

3. Enter an account name and password. The factory login name and password are: admin, password. The password is for the switch and is stored in the switch firmware.

— See “ User account security ” on page 35 for information about user authentication.

— See “ Managing user accounts ” on page 58 or the

“ User command ” on page 171

for information about creating user accounts.

4. Click Add Fabric.

Note: A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions as follows:

■

Four logins or sessions for internal applications such as management server and SNMP

■

■

Nine high priority Telnet sessions

Six logins or sessions for Switch Manager inband and out-of-band logins, and Telnet logins.

Additional logins are refused.

Removing a fabric

To delete a fabric file from the database:

1. Select a fabric in the fabric tree.

2. Select Fabric > Remove Fabric.

Opening a fabric view file

A fabric view file is one or more fabrics saved to a file.

1. Select File > Open View File, or click Open. If the fabric you are currently viewing has changed, you are prompted to save the changes to the fabric view file with the Save View dialog box before opening a different view file.

2. Enter the name of the file to open, and enter a file password, if a password was entered when this fabric view file was saved.

3. Click OK.


37

Switch Manager

Saving a fabric view file


2. Enter a new file name.

3. Enter a file password, if necessary.

4. Click OK.

Rediscovering a fabric

After making changes to or deleting switches from a fabric view, it may be helpful to again view the actual fabric configuration. The rediscover fabric option clears out the current fabric information being displayed, and rediscovers all switch information. The rediscover function is more comprehensive than the refresh function.

To rediscover a fabric, select Fabric > Rediscover Fabric.

Adding a new switch to a fabric

If there are no special conditions to be configured for the new switch, simply plug in the switch and the switch becomes functional with the default fabric configuration. Default fabric configuration settings:

■

Fabric zoning is sent to the switch from the fabric.

■

All ports are GL_Ports.

■

The default IP address 10.0.0.1 is assigned to the switch without a gateway or boot protocol configured (RARP, BOOTP, and DHCP).

If you are adding a new switch to a fabric and do not want to accept the default fabric configuration, do the following:

1. If the switch is not new, reset the switch to the factory configuration before adding the switch to the fabric by selecting Switch > Restore Factory Defaults.

2. If you want to manage the switch through the Ethernet port, you must first configure the IP address using the Network Properties dialog box or the Config Wizard.

3. Configure any special switch settings.

Consider configuring the Default Visibility setting to None in the Zoning Config dialog box to prevent devices from finding other devices on all switches in the fabric until the new switch is configured. To open the Zoning Config dialog box, select Zoning > Edit

Zoning Config.

4. Configure the port types for the new switch using the Port Properties dialog box.

The ports can be G_Port, GL_Port, F_Port, FL_Port, or Donor.

5. Connect the devices to the switch.

6. Make any necessary zoning changes using the Edit Zoning dialog box.

To open the Edit Zoning dialog box, select Zoning > Edit Zoning. If you changed the

Default Visibility setting in the Zoning Config dialog box from All to None, change that setting back to All. To open the Zoning Config dialog box, select Zoning > Edit Zoning

Config.

38


Switch Manager

Replacing a failed switch

The archive/restore works for all switches. However, the Restore menu item is not available for the in-band switches. You can only restore a switch out-of-band (the fabric management switch). There are certain parameters that are not archived, and these are not restored by

Switch Manager. See “ Archiving a switch configuration ” on page 75 and “ Restoring a switch configuration ” on page 75 for information about archive and restore. Use the following

procedure to replace a failed switch for which an archive is available.

1. At the failed switch: a.

Turn off the power and disconnect the AC cords.

b.

Note port locations and remove the interconnection cables and SFPs.

c.

Remove the failed switch.

2. At the replacement switch: a.

Mount the switch in the location where the failed switch was removed.

b.

Install the SFPs using the same ports as were used on the failed switch.

Caution: Do not reconnect the target devices and initiator devices at this time. Doing so could invalidate the fabric zoning configuration.

c.

Attach the AC cords and power up the switch.

3. Select the failed switch in the topology display, and then select Switch > Delete.

4. Restore the configuration from the failed switch to the replacement switch: a.

Open a new fabric through the replacement switch.

b.

Open the faceplate display for the replacement switch, and then select Switch >

Restore. The Restore dialog box is displayed.

c.

Enter the archive file for the failed switch or browse for the file.

d. Click Restore.

5. Select Switch > Reset Switch.

This resets the replacement switch to activate the configuration formerly possessed by the failed switch including the domain ID and the zoning database.

6. Reconnect the target devices, and initiator devices to the replacement switch using the same ports as were used on the failed switch.

Deleting switches and links

The Switch Manager application does not automatically delete switches or links that have failed or have been physically removed from the Fibre Channel network. In these cases, you can delete switches and links to bring the display up to date. If you delete a switch or a link that is still active, the Switch Manager application automatically restores itself. The display can also be refreshed.

Deleting a switch

To delete a switch:

1. Select one or more switches in the topology display, and then select Switch > Delete.


39

Switch Manager

Deleting a link

To delete a link:

1. Select one or more links in the topology display, and then select Switch > Delete.

Displaying fabric information

The topology display is the primary tool for monitoring a fabric. The graphic window of the topology display provides status information for switches and the Ethernet connection to the management workstation.

The data window tabs show name server, switch, and active zone set information. The Active

Zoneset tab shows the zone definitions for the active zone set. See “ Name Server data window ” on page 63 and “ Switch data window ” on page 63 for information about the Name

Server and Switch data windows.

Fabric status

The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in status to the management workstation as they occur. You can allow the fabric to update the display status, or you can refresh the display at any time.

To refresh the topology display, do one of the following:

■

Click Refresh.

■

Select View > Refresh.

■

■

Press F5.

Right-click anywhere in the background of the topology display, and then click Refresh

Fabric from the menu.

The topology display uses switch and status icons to provide status information about switches and the Ethernet connection. The switch status icons, displayed on the left side of a switch, vary in shape and color. Switches controlled by an Ethernet Internet Protocol have a colored

Ethernet icon displayed on the right side of the switch. A green Ethernet icon indicates normal operation, yellow indicates a condition that may require attention to maintain maximum performance, and red indicates a potential failure.

Table 6 shows the different switch icons and

their meanings.

40


Switch Manager

Table 6: Topology display switch and status icons

Switch Icon Description

2/8q FC Switch

■

Normal operation (green)

■

■

■

Warning—Operational with errors (yellow)

Critical—Potential failure (red)

Unknown—Communication status unknown, unreachable, or unmanageable (blue)

Fabric Management Switch:

■

Ethernet connection normal (green)

■

■

Ethernet connection warning (yellow)

Ethernet connection critical (red)

Switch is not manageable with this version of Switch

Manager. Use the management application that was shipped with this switch.

Event Browser

The Event Browser displays a list of events generated by the switches in the fabric and the

Switch Manager application. Events are generated by the Switch Manager application and are not saved on the switch, but can be saved to a file during the Switch Manager session. Entries in the Event Browser are formatted by severity, time stamp, source, type, and description. The maximum number of entries allowed is 1500. Once the maximum is reached, the event list wraps and the oldest events are discarded and replaced with the new events. Event entries from the switch, use the switch time stamp, while event entries generated by the application have a workstation time stamp. You can filter, sort, and export the contents of the Event Browser to a file. The Event Browser begins recording when enabled and Switch Manager is running.

If the Event Browser is enabled using the Preferences dialog box, the next time Switch

Manager is started all events from the switch log are displayed. If the Event Browser is disabled when Switch Manager is started and later enabled, only those events from the time the Event Browser was enabled and forward are displayed.

Displaying the Event Browser

Perform the following to display the Event Browser:

1. Select Fabric > Show Event Browser or click Events on the tool bar. The Events

Browser is displayed ( Figure 13 ).

If the Show Event Browser selection or the Events button is grayed-out, you must first

enable the Events Browser preference. See “ Setting Switch Manager preferences ” on page 24.

Severity is indicated in the severity column, using icons as described in

Table 7 .


41

Switch Manager

1

2

42

1

Severity column

Figure 13: Event Browser

2

Column sorting buttons

Note:

■

Events that are generated by the application are not saved on the switch. They are permanently discarded when you close a Switch Manager session, but you can save these events to a file on the workstation before closing Switch Manager and can read it later with a text editor or browser.

■

Events that are generated by the switch are stored on the switch, and retrieved when the

application is restarted. Some alarms are configurable. See “ Configuring port threshold alarms ” on page 66.

Table 7: Event severity levels

Severity Icon

No icon

Description

Alarm—An Alarm is any event that is a “serviceable event.” This means that attention by the user or field service is required. Alarms are events that get posted asynchronously to the screen. Alarms cannot be turned off. If the alarm denotes that a system error has occurred, the customer or field representative will be directed to provide a “show support” capture of the switch.

Critical Event—An event generated by the Switch Manager application and indicates a potential failure. Critical log messages are events that warrant notice by the user. By default, these log messages are posted to the screen.

Critical log messages do not have alarm status because they require no immediate attention from a user or service representative.

Warning Event—An event generated by the Switch Manager application that indicates errors or other conditions that may require attention to maintain maximum performance. Warning messages are not posted to the screen unless the log is configured to do so. Warning messages are not disruptive and therefore do not meet the criteria of Critical. The user need not be informed asynchronously.

Informative—An unclassified event generated by the Switch Manager application that provides supporting information.


Switch Manager

Filtering the Event Browser

Filtering the Event Browser enables you to display only those events that are of interest based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, and description. To filter the Event Browser,

select Filter > Filter Entries. This opens the Filter Events dialog box ( Figure 14 ). The Event

Browser displays those events that meet all of the criteria in the Filter Events dialog box. If the filtering criteria is cleared or changed, all the events that were previously hidden that satisfy the new criteria are shown.

You can filter the event browser in the following ways:

■

■

■

Severity—Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes to display alarm events, critical events, warning events, or informative events.

Date/Time—Check one or both of the From: and To: check boxes. Enter the bounding timestamps (MM/dd/yy hh:mm:ss aa) to display only those events that fall within those times. (“aa” indicates AM or PM.) The current year (yy) can be entered as either 2 or 4 digits. For example, 12/12/03 will be interpreted December 12, 2003.

Text—Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes and enter a text string (case sensitive) for event source, type, and description. The Event Browser displays only those events that satisfy all of the search specifications for the Source, Type, and Description text.

Figure 14: Filter Events dialog box

Sorting the Event Browser

Sorting the Event Browser enables you to display the events in alphanumeric order based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, or description. Initially, the Event Browser is sorted in ascending order by timestamp.

To sort the Event Browser, click the Severity, Timestamp, Source, Type, or Description column buttons. You can also open the Sort menu and then select By Severity, By

Timestamp, By Source, By Type, or By Description. Successive sort operations of the same type alternate between ascending and descending order.


43

Switch Manager

Saving the Event Browser to a file

To save the Event Browser to a file:

Note: Filtered events are not saved.

1. Filter and sort the Event Browser to obtain the desired display.

2. Select File > Save As.

3. Select a folder and enter a file name in which to save the event log, and then click Save.

The file can be saved in XML, CSV, or text format. XML files can be opened with an internet browser or text editor. CSV files can be opened with Microsoft Excel or most spreadsheet applications.

Active Zoneset data window

The Active Zoneset data window displays the zone membership for the active zone set that resides on the fabric management switch.

To open the Active Zoneset data window, click the Active Zoneset tab below the data window

in the topology display. See “ Configured Zonesets data windows ” on page 65 for information

about the zone set definitions on a particular switch. See “ Zoning a fabric ” on page 45 for

more information about zone sets and zones.

The Active Zoneset data window (

Figure 15 ) uses display conventions for expanding and

contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded. Click this handle or double-click the following entries:

■

A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.

■

■

A zone entry expands to show its member port/devices.

WWN and FC devices that are zoned, but no longer part of the fabric, are grayed-out.

44

Figure 15: Active Zoneset data window


Switch Manager

Zoning a fabric

Zoning enables you to divide the ports and devices of the fabric into zones for more efficient and secure communication among functionally grouped nodes. This subsection addresses the following topics:

■

■

Zoning concepts , page 45

Using the Zoning Config dialog box , page 48

■

■

■

■

Restoring default zoning , page 48

Merging fabrics and zoning , page 49

Using the Edit Zoning dialog box , page 49

Managing zone sets , page 52

■

■

■

Managing zones , page 54

Managing aliases , page 56

Saving the Zoning Database to a File , page 57

Zoning concepts

The following zoning concepts provide some context for the zoning tasks described in this section:

■

■

Zones

Aliases

■

■

■

Zone sets

Zoning database

Zoning configuration

Zones

A zone is a named group of ports or devices that can communicate with each other. Devices within a zone can only communicate with other devices in the same zone. A device may participate in more than one zone.

Membership in a zone can be defined by switch domain ID and port number, device Fibre

Channel address, or device World Wide Name (WWN).

■

WWN entries define zone membership by the World Wide Name of the attached device.

With this membership method, you can move WWN member devices to different switch ports in different zones without having to edit the member entry as you would with a domain ID/port number member. Furthermore, unlike FCID members, WWN zone members are not affected by changes in the fabric that could change the Fibre Channel address of an attached device.

■

■

FCID entries define zone membership by the Fibre Channel address of the attached device. With this membership method you can replace a device on the same port without having to edit the member entry as you would with a WWN member.

Domain ID/Port number entries define zone membership by switch domain ID and port number. All devices attached to the specified port become members of the zone. The specified port must be an F_Port or an FL_Port.


45

Switch Manager

46

Two types of zones are supported. The following zone types define increasingly restrictive levels of communication.

■

■

Soft zones

Hard zones (ACL zoning)

Soft Zones

Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery. Devices within the same soft zone automatically discover and communicate freely with all other members of the same zone. The soft zone boundary is not secure; traffic across soft zones can occur if addressed correctly. Soft zone boundaries yield to ACL zone boundaries. Soft zones can overlap; that is, a device can participate in more than one soft zone. Zone membership can be defined by Fibre

Channel address, domain ID and port number, World Wide Name, or a combination. Soft zoning supports all port types.

Hard Zoning (ACL Zoning)

Access Control List (ACL) zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery and inbound traffic. ACL zoning is a type of hard zoning that is hardware enforced. This type of zoning is useful for controlling access to certain devices without totally isolating them from the fabric. Devices can communicate with each other and transmit outside the ACL zone, but cannot receive inbound traffic from outside the zone. The ACL zone boundary is secure against inbound traffic. ACL zones can overlap; that is, a port can be a member of more than one ACL zone. ACL zone boundaries supersede soft zone boundaries. Membership can be defined only by domain ID and port number. ACL zoning supports all port types.

Aliases

To make it easier to add a group of ports or devices to one or more zones, you can create an alias. An alias is a named set of ports or devices that are grouped together for convenience.

Unlike zones, aliases impose no communication restrictions between its members. You can add an alias to one or more zones. However, you cannot add a zone to an alias, nor can an alias be a member of another alias.

Zone sets

A zone set is a named group of zones. A zone can be a member of more than one zone set. All zones that are not members of a zone set belong to the orphan zone set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch. Each switch in the fabric maintains its own zoning database containing one or more zone sets. This zoning database resides in non-volatile or permanent memory and

is therefore retained after a reset. See “ Configured Zonesets data windows ” on page 65 for

information about displaying the zoning database.

To apply zoning to a fabric, choose a zone set and activate it. When you activate a zone set, the switch distributes that zone set and its zones, excluding aliases, to every switch in the fabric.

This zone set is known as the active zone set. See “ Active Zoneset data window ” on page 44

for information about displaying the active zone set.

Zoning database

Each switch has its own zoning database. The zoning database is made up of all aliases, zones, and zone sets that have been created on the switch or received from other switches. The switch maintains two copies of the inactive zoning database: one copy is maintained in temporary memory for editing purposes; the second copy is maintained in permanent memory. Zoning database edits are made on an individual switch basis and are not propagated to other switches in the fabric when saved.


Switch Manager

The zoning limits for a fabric are as follows:

■

■

MaxZoneSets is 256—The maximum number of zone sets that can be configured on the switch. This is enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric.

MaxZones is 256—The maximum number of zones that can be configured on the switch.

This is enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric.

■

■

■

■

■

MaxAliases is 256—The maximum number of aliases that can be configured on the switch. This is enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric.

MaxTotalMembers is 2000—The maximum number of total zone and alias members that can be configured on the switch. This is enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric. Aliases are considered zone members since they can be added to a zone just like a normal zone member.

MaxZonesInZoneSets is 1000—The maximum number of zone linkages to zone sets that can be configured on the switch. This is enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric. Every time a zone is added to a zoneset this constitutes a linkage.

MaxMembersPerZone is 2000—The maximum number of zone members that can be added to any zone on the switch. This is enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric. Aliases are considered zone members when added to a zone.

MaxMembersPerAlias is 2000—The maximum number of zone members that can be added to any alias on the switch. This is enforced during the configuration of zoning and during a zoning database merge from the fabric.


You can set the Interop Auto Save and Default Visibility zoning configuration parameters using Switch Manager. The Interop Auto Save parameter determines whether changes to the active zone set that a switch receives from another switch in the fabric is saved to permanent memory on that switch. Interop Auto Save is not supported at this time. The Default Visibility parameter permits or prohibits communication among ports/devices when there is no active

zone set. See “ Using the Zoning Config dialog box ” on page 48 for information about zoning

configuration using Switch Manager.


47

Switch Manager

Using the Zoning Config dialog box

Use the Zoning Config dialog box to change the Interop Auto Save and Default Visibility configuration parameters. In the faceplate display, select Zoning > Edit Zoning Config to open the Zoning Config dialog box (

Figure 16

). After making changes, click OK to put the new values into effect.

Figure 16: Zoning Config dialog box

Interop Auto Save parameter

The Interop Auto Save parameter determines whether changes to the active zone set that a switch receives from other switches in the fabric is saved to the zoning database on that switch. Changes are saved when an updated zone set is activated. Zoning changes are always saved to temporary memory. However, if Interop Auto Save is enabled, the switch firmware saves changes to the active zone set in temporary memory and to the zoning database. If

Interop Auto Save is disabled, changes to the active zone set are stored only in temporary memory, which is cleared when the switch is reset. Interop Auto Save is not supported at this time.

Note: Disabling the Interop Auto Save parameter can be useful to prevent the propagation of zoning information when experimenting with different zoning schemes. However, leaving the

Interop Auto Save parameter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a switch have to be reset. For this reason, the Interop Auto Save parameter should be enabled in a production environment. Interop Auto Save is not supported at this time.

Default Visibility parameter

Default visibility determines the level of communication that is permitted among ports/devices when there is no active zone set. The default visibility parameter can be set differently on each switch. When default visibility is enabled (ALL) on a switch, all ports/devices on the switch can communicate with all ports/devices on switches that also have default visibility enabled.

When Default Visibility is disabled (NONE), none of the ports/devices on that switch can communicate with any other port/device in the fabric.

Restoring default zoning

Restoring the default zoning clears the switch of all zoning definitions.

Caution: This command deactivates the active zone set.

48

1. In the faceplate display, select Zoning > Restore Default Zoning.

2. Click OK to restore default zoning and save changes to the zoning database.


Switch Manager

Merging fabrics and zoning

Note: HP does not support merging fabrics.

Zone merge failure

A zone merge fails if the two active zone sets have member zones with identical names that differ in membership or type. For example, consider Fabric A and Fabric B, each with a soft zone named “ZN1” in its active zone set. Fabric A “ZN1” contains a member specified by

Domain ID 1 and Port 1; Fabric B “ZN1” contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and

Port 2. In this case, the merge fails because the two zones have the same name, but different membership.

Zone Merge failure recovery

When a zone merge failure occurs, the conflict that caused the failure must be resolved. You can correct a failure due to a zone conflict by deactivating one of the active zone sets or by editing the conflicting zones so that their membership is the same. You can deactivate the active zone set on one fabric if the active zone set on the other fabric accurately defines your zoning needs. If not, you must edit the zone memberships, and reactivate the zone sets. After correcting the zone membership, reset the isolated ports to allow the fabrics to join.

Note: If you deactivate the active zone set in one fabric and the Interop Auto Save parameter is enabled, the active zone set from the second fabric propagates to the first fabric and replace all zones with matching names in the configured zone sets. Interop Auto Save is not supported at this time.

If the zone sets to merge have the same Zone A that only differ in the type of zone (soft vs. hard), the zone sets merge. If this is a 2 switch fabric, Switch 1 states that Zone A is soft and Switch 2 states that Zone A is ACL.

See “ Managing zones ” on page 54 for information about adding and removing zone members.

See “ Resetting a port ” on page 89 for information about resetting a port.

Using the Edit Zoning dialog box

To edit the zoning database for a particular switch, select Zoning > Edit Zoning. The Edit

Zoning dialog box is displayed (

Figure 17 ). Changes can only be made to inactive zone sets,

which are stored in flash (non-volatile) memory and retained after resetting a switch.

To apply zoning to a fabric, choose a zone set and activate it. When you activate a zone set, the switch distributes that zone set and its zones, excluding aliases, to every switch in the fabric.

This zone set is known as the active zone set.

You can not edit an active zone set on a switch. You must configure an inactive zone set to your needs and then activate that updated zone set to apply the changes to the fabric. When you activate a zone set, the switch distributes that zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the fabric. In addition to the merged active zone set, each switch maintains its own original zone set in its zoning database. Only one zone set can be active at one time.


49

Switch Manager

1

50

2

1

Zone sets tree

Figure 17: Edit Zoning dialog box

2

Port/Device tree

Note: If the Interop Mode parameter is enabled on the Switch Properties dialog box, every time the active zone set changes, the switch copies it into an inactive zone set stored on the switch. You can edit this copy of the active zone set stored on the switch, and activate the updated copy to apply the changes to the active zone set. The edited copy then becomes the active zone set.

As illustrated in

Figure 17

, the Edit Zoning dialog box has a Zone Sets tree and a Port/Device

(or members) tree. Both trees use display conventions similar to the fabric tree for expanding and contracting zone sets, zones, and ports. An expanded port shows the port Fibre Channel address; an expanded address shows the port World Wide Name. Select items as follows:

■

■

Click a zone, zone set, or port icon.

Right-click to select a zone set or zone, and then open the corresponding menu.

■

■

Hold down Shift while clicking several consecutive icons.

Hold down Ctrl while clicking several non-consecutive icons. Using tool bar buttons, menus, or a drag-and-drop method, you can create and manage zone sets and zones in the zoning database.

Table 8

describes the zoning tool bar operations.

After defining zoning changes, click OK to implement those changes and exit the Edit Zoning dialog box. Click Apply to save changes without closing the Edit Zoning dialog box. Before zoning changes are implemented, Switch Manager checks for and reports zoning conflicts:

■

Empty zone sets

■

■

■

Empty zones

Empty aliases

ACL zones with non-domain ID/port number membership


Switch Manager

Table 8: Edit Zoning dialog box tool bar buttons and icons

Tool bar button / icon Description

Create Zone Set—Create a new zone set

Create Zone—Create a new zone

Create Alias—Create another name for a set of objects

Insert Member—Add the selected zone to a zone set, or add the selected port/device to a zone

Remove Member—Delete the selected zone from a zone set, or delete the selected port/device from a zone

Switch port—Not logged in

Switch port—Logged in

NL_Port (loop) device—Logged into fabric

NL_Port (loop) device—Not logged into fabric

N_Port device—Logged into a fabric

N_Port device—Not logged into a fabric


51

Switch Manager

Managing zone sets

Zoning a fabric involves creating a zone set, creating zones as zone set members, and then adding devices as zone members. The zoning database supports multiple zone sets to serve the different security and access needs of your storage area network, but only one zone set can be active at one time. Managing zone sets consists of the following tasks:

■

Creating a zone set

■

■

■

■

■

Activating and deactivating a zone set

Copying a zone to a zone set

Removing a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets

Removing a zone set

Removing all zoning definitions

Note: Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit the zoning databases on the individual switches.

Creating a zone set

1. Select Zoning > Edit Zoning. The Edit Zoning dialog box is displayed ( Figure 17 ).

2. Select Edit > Create Zone Set. The Create Zone Set dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter a name for the zone set, and then click OK. The new zone set name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog box. A zone set name must begin with a letter and be no longer than

64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, -, ^, and $.

4. To create new zones in a zone set, do one of the following:

— Right-click a zone set and then select Create A Zone from the menu. In the Create a

Zone dialog box, enter a name for the new zone, and then click OK. The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog box.

— Copy an existing zone by dragging a zone into the new zone set. See “ Copying a zone to a zone set ” on page 53.

5. Click Apply to save changes to the zoning database.

Activating and deactivating a zone set

You must activate a zone set to apply its zoning definitions to the fabric. Only one zone set can be active at one time. When you activate a zone set, the switch distributes that zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the fabric.

The purpose of the deactivate function is to suspend all fabric zoning, which results in free communication fabric wide or no communication depending on the default visibility setting.

See “ Default Visibility parameter ” on page 48 for more information. It is not necessary to

deactivate the active zone set before activating a new one.

■

■

To activate a zone set, select Zoning > Activate Zone Set. The Activate Zone Set dialog box is displayed. Select a zone set from the Select Zone Set menu, and then click

Activate.

To deactivate the active zone set, select Zoning > Deactivate Zone Set. Acknowledge the warning about traffic disruption, and then click Yes to confirm that you want to deactivate the active zone set.

52


Switch Manager

Copying a zone to a zone set

To copy an existing zone and its membership from one zone set to another, Do the following:

1. Select the zone and drag it to the chosen zone set.


Removing a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets

You can remove a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets in the database.

1. Select Zoning > Edit Zoning. The Edit Zoning dialog box is displayed ( Figure 17 ).

2. Select the zone(s) to be removed from the Zone Sets tree.

3. Select Edit > Remove to remove the zone from the zone set, or select Remove from All

Zones to remove the zone from all zone sets.


Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets in the database.

Removing a zone set

Removing a zone set from the database affects the member zones in the following ways:

■

Member zones that are members of other zone sets are not affected.

■

Member zones that are not members of other zone sets become members of the orphan zone set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch.

1. Select Zoning > Edit Zoning. The Edit Zoning dialog box is displayed ( Figure 17 ).

2. Select the zone set to be removed in the Zone Sets tree.

3. Select Edit > Remove to remove the zone set.


Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone set from the database.

Removing all zoning definitions

To clear all zone and zone set definitions from the zoning database, choose one of the following:

■

■

Select Edit > Clear Zoning, and then click Yes in the Removes All dialog box to confirm that you want to delete all zones and zone sets.

Right-click the Zone Sets heading at the top of the Zone Sets tree, and then select Clear

Zoning from the menu. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete all zone sets and zones.


53

Switch Manager

Managing zones

Managing zones involves the following:

■

Creating a zone in a zone set

■

■

Adding zone members

Creating a member

■

■

■

■

■

Renaming a zone or a zone set

Removing a zone member

Removing a zone from a zone set

Removing a zone from all zone sets

Changing zone types

Note: Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit the zoning databases on the individual switches.

Creating a zone in a zone set

When a zone is created, its zone type is soft. To change the zone type to a hard zone, refer to

“ Changing zone types

” on page 56 for more information. See “ Zones ” on page 45 for

information on zone types (soft and hard).


2. Select a zone set.

3. Select Edit > Create a Zone. The Create a Zone dialog box is displayed.

4. Enter a name for the new zone.

5. Click OK.

The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog box. A zone name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, ^, $, and -.

Note: If you enter the name of a zone that already exists in the database, the Switch Manager asks if you would like to add that zone and its membership to the zone set.

6. To add switch ports or attached devices to the zone, do one of the following:

— In the zone set tree, select the zone set. In the graphic window, select the port to add to the zone. Select Edit > Add Members.

— Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide Name in the

Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone.

— Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide Name in the

Port/Device tree. Right-click the zone and then select Add Zone Members.


54


Switch Manager

Adding zone members

Adding a zone member to a zone affects every zone set in which that zone is a member. To add member ports/devices to a zone, do one of the following:

■

Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide Name in the

Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone. To select and drag multiple ports/devices, press and hold Ctrl while dragging.

■

■

Select one or more ports by port number, Fibre Channel address, or World Wide Name in the Port/Device tree. Right-click the zone and then select Add Zone Members from the menu.

Select Edit > Create Members. Choose the WWN, Domain/Port, or First Port Address option and enter the port hex value.

Click Apply to save changes to the zoning database.

Note: Domain ID conflicts can result in automatic reassignment of switch domain IDs. These reassignments are not reflected in zones that use domain ID/port number pair to define their membership. Be sure to reconfigure zones that are affected by a domain ID change.

Creating a member

The Create a Member dialog box allows you to add a member to a zone or alias that can not be added using the drag/drop method.


2. Select the zone or alias in the left pane in which to add a member.

3. Select Edit > Create Members. The Create a Member dialog box is displayed.

4. Click WWN, Domain Port, or FC Address.

5. Enter the hexadecimal value for the new zone member. Enter 16 digits for a WWN member, 4 digits for a Domain Port member (DDPP), or 6 digits for an FC Address member (DDPPAA - D=Domain ID, P=PortNumber, A=ALPA).

6. Click OK.

Renaming a zone or a zone set


2. Select the zone/zone set to be renamed in the Zone Sets tree.

3. Select Edit > Rename. The Rename Zone/Rename Zone Set dialog box is displayed.

4. Enter a new name for the zone/zone set.

5. Click OK.

Removing a zone member

Removing a zone member affects every zone and zone set in which that zone is a member.


2. Select the zone member to be removed.

3. Select Edit > Remove.

4. Click OK.


55

Switch Manager

Removing a zone from a zone set

Zones that are no longer members of any zone set are moved to the orphan zone set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch.


2. Select the zone to be removed in the Edit Zoning dialog box.

The selected zone is removed from that zone set only.

3. Select Edit > Remove.

4. Click OK.

Removing a zone from all zone sets

Zones that are no longer members of any zone set are moved to the orphan zone set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch. To remove a zone from all zone sets including the orphan zone set:


2. Select the zone to be removed in the Edit Zoning dialog box.

3. Select Edit > Remove Zone from All Sets.

4. Click OK.

Changing zone types

1. Select the switch with the zone type to change in the faceplate display.

2. Select Zoning. The Edit Zoning dialog box is displayed ( Figure 17

).

3. Select the zone to change in the Zone Sets tree.

4. Select Edit > Set Zone Type. The Set Zone Type dialog box is displayed.

5. Select Soft or ACL from the Zone Type drop-down list.

— Soft zoning is the least restrictive type of zoning.

— ACL zoning is hard zoning and is enforced by hardware and defines access to a given port.

Managing aliases

An alias is a collection of objects that can be zoned together. An alias is not a zone, and can not have a zone or another alias as a member. Managing aliases includes:

■

■

■

Creating an alias

Adding a member to an alias

Removing an alias from all zones

Note: Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit the zoning databases on the individual switches. You do not see aliases in the active zone set.

56


Switch Manager

Creating an alias


2. Select Edit > Create Alias. The Create Alias dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter a name for the alias, and then click OK.

The alias name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog box. An alias name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -.

4. Click OK.

Adding a member to an alias

You can add a member to an alias in the following ways:

■

■

Drag-and-drop method.

Select the alias in the left pane and the member in the right pane to add to that alias, and then click Insert.

■

Select the alias in the left pane and the member in the right pane to add to that alias, and then select Edit > Add Members.

To add a member to an alias using the drag-and-drop method:

1. On the member to be added, click and hold down the mouse button.

2. Drag the selected member from the right pane to the alias in the left pane.

To add a member to an alias using the menu options:


2. Select an alias in the left pane.

3. Select the member to add to the selected alias in the right pane.

4. Choose one of the following:

— Select Edit > Add Members.

— Click Insert.

5. Click OK.

Removing an alias from all zones

To remove an alias from all zones:


2. Select the alias to be removed in the Zone Sets tree.

3. Select Edit > Remove Alias from All Zones. The Remove dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Yes.

Saving the Zoning Database to a File

You can save the zoning database to an XML file. You can later reload this zoning database on the same switch or another switch.


2. Select File > Save As. The Save dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter a file name for the database file.

4. Click Save.


57

Switch Manager

Managing switches

This section describes the following tasks that manage switches in the fabric.

■

■

Managing user accounts , page 58

Displaying switch information , page 62

■

■

■

■

Configuring port threshold alarms , page 66

Exporting name server information to a file , page 67

Paging a switch , page 67

Setting the date/time and NTP client , page 68

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Resetting a switch , page 68

Configuring a switch , page 68

Archiving a switch configuration , page 75

Restoring a switch configuration , page 75

Restoring the factory default configuration , page 77

Downloading a support file , page 78

Installing firmware , page 78

Displaying hardware status , page 79

Managing user accounts

Only the Admin account can manage user accounts with the User Account Administration dialog box. However, any user can modify their own password. Select Switch > User

Accounts. The User Account Administration dialog box is displayed. A user account includes an account name or login, password, authority level, and expiration date.

Switches come from the factory with the following user accounts:

Table 9: Factory Supplied User Accounts

Account name admin images admin

Password images

Admin authority true false

Expiration never expires never expires

The Admin account can create, remove, or modify user accounts, and change account passwords. The Admin account can also view and modify the switch and its configuration with

Switch Manager. The Admin account can not be removed. Users without Admin authority are limited to viewing switch status and configuration.

The Images account can not be removed, and is required for exchanging files with the switch using FTP.

Managing user accounts includes:

■

Creating user accounts

■

Removing a user account

■

■

Changing a user account password

Modifying a user account

58


Switch Manager

Creating user accounts

A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts.

1. Select Switch > User Accounts. The User Account Administration dialog box is displayed (

Figure 18 ).

Figure 18: User Account Administration dialog box – Add Account

2. Click the Add Account tab at the bottom of the dialog box. The Add Account tab is displayed.

3. Enter an account name in the New Account Login box. Account names are limited to 15 characters.

4. Click the Admin Authority Enabled check box to grant admin authority to the account name.

5. Enter a password in the New Password box and enter it again in the Verify Password box. A password must have a minimum of 4 characters and no more than 20.

6. Select an option from the Account Expiration Date area.

7. Click Add Account.

Removing a user account

1. Select Switch > User Accounts. The User Account Administration dialog box is displayed (

Figure 18 ).

2. Click the Remove Account tab at the bottom of the dialog box. The Remove Account tab is displayed (

Figure 19 ).

3. Select the account (login) name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog box, and then click Remove Account.


59

Switch Manager

Figure 19: User Account Administration dialog box – Remove Account

Changing a user account password

1. Select Switch > User Accounts. The User Account Administration dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the Change Password tab at the bottom of the dialog box. The Change Password tab is displayed (

Figure 20 ).

3. Select the account (login) name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog box,

4. Enter the password in the Old Password, New Password, and Verify Password boxes.

5. Click Change Password.

Any user can change their password for their account, but only the Admin account name can change the password for another user’s account. If the administrator does not know the user’s original password, the administrator must remove the account, and then add the account again.

60


Switch Manager

Figure 20: User Account Administration dialog box – Change Password

Modifying a user account

1. Select Switch > User Accounts. The User Account Administration dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the Modify Account tab at the bottom of the dialog box. The Modify Account tab is displayed (

Figure 21 ).

Figure 21: User Account Administration dialog box—Modify Account

3. Select the account (login) name from the list of accounts at the top of the dialog box.


61

Switch Manager

4. Click the Admin Authority Enabled check box to grant admin authority to the account name.

5. Select an option from the Account Expiration Date area.

6. Click Modify Account.

7. Click Close.

Displaying switch information

The following faceplate display and data windows provide information about the name server, the device and HBA, switch specifications and addresses, configuration parameters, performance statistics, port information and configured zone sets information.

■

Name Server data window , page 63

■

■

■

■

■

Switch data window , page 63

Link data window , page 64

Port Statistics data window , page 64

Port Information data window , page 65

Configured Zonesets data windows , page 65

62

Figure 22: Faceplate display—Switch data window

The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in status to the management system as they occur. You can allow the fabric to update the switch status, or you can refresh the display at any time.

To refresh switch status in the display, do one of the following:

■

Click Refresh.

■

■

■

■

Select View > Refresh.

Press F5.

Right-click a switch in the topology display, and then select Refresh Switch.

Right-click in the graphic window of the faceplate display, and then select Refresh

Switch.


Switch Manager

Name Server data window

The Name Server data window displays information about the devices that are logged into the fabric. Click the Name Server tab below the data window to display name server information for all devices that are logged into the selected fabric. To narrow the display to devices that are logged into specific switches, select one or more switches in the fabric tree or the topology display. See

Table 10 for a description of the entries in the Name Server data window and

refer to “ Exporting name server information to a file ” on page 67 for more information.

Table 10: Name Server data window entries

Target/Initiator

Switch

Port

Address

Type

WWNN

WWPN

Vendor

FC-4 types

Active zones

Entry Description

Device type: target or initiator

Switch name

Switch port address

Fibre Channel address

Node type

World Wide Node Name

World Wide Port Name

Host Bus Adapter/Device vendor

Device Fibre Channel protocol types

The active zone to which the device belongs

Switch data window

The Switch data window displays current network and switch information for the selected

switches. See “ Configuring a switch ” on page 68 for more information about the Switch data

window. To open the Switch data window, select one or more switches in the topology display, or open the faceplate display, and then click the Switch tab below the data window.

Table 11 describes the Switch data window entries.

Table 11: Switch data window entries

First port address

World Wide Name

Serial number

Entry

Reason for status

User name

Login level

Super user

User authentication enabled

Vendor

Firmware version

Inactive firmware version

Pending firmware version

Description

Switch Fibre Channel address

Switch World Wide Name

Number assigned to each switch chassis

(required for license keys)

Additional status information

Account name

Authority level

Super user privileges enabled/disabled

Enforcement of account names and authority

Switch manufacturer

Active firmware version

This does not apply to this switch

Firmware version that is activated at the next reset


63

Switch Manager

Table 11: Switch data window entries (Continued)

Entry

PROM/Boot version

MAC address

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway

SNMP enabled

Negotiated domain ID

Configured domain ID

Domain ID lock

Number of ports

Switch type

Operational state

Administrative state

Configured admin state

R_A_TOV

E_D_TOV

Description

PROM boot version

Media Access Control address

Internet Protocol address

Mask that determines the IP address subnet

Gateway address

SNMP enabled/disabled

The domain ID currently being used by the fabric

The domain ID defined by the network administrator

Domain ID lock status

(prevents (true) or permits (false) dynamic domain ID reassignment)

Number of ports activated on the switch

Switch model

Switch operational state: online, offline, diagnostic

Current switch administrative state

Switch administrative state that is stored in the switch configuration

Resource allocation timeout value

Error detect timeout value

Link data window

The Link data window displays information about all switch links in the fabric or selected links. This information includes the switch name, the port number at the end of each link, and the link status.

To open the Link data window, click the Link tab below the data window in the topology display.

Port Statistics data window

The Port Statistics data window displays port performance data for the selected ports.

To open the Port Statistics data window, click the Port Stats tab below the data window in the

faceplate display. See Table 23 for a description of the Port Statistics data window entries.

The Statistics menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and provides different ways to view detailed port information. Click the down arrow to open the menu. Open the menu, and then select Absolute to view the total count of statistics since the last switch reset.

Select Rate to view the number of statistics counted per second over the polling period. Select

Baseline to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set. Click

Clear Baseline to set the current baseline.

64


Switch Manager

Port Information data window

The Port Information data window displays port detail information for the selected ports. To open the Port Statistics data window, click the Port Info tab below the data window in the faceplate display. Refer to

Table 24 for a description of the Port Information data window

entries.

Configured Zonesets data windows

The Configured Zonesets data window displays all zone sets, zones, aliases, and zone

membership in the zoning database ( Figure 23 ).

To open the Configured Zonesets data window, click the Configured Zonesets tab below the data window in the faceplate display. To view the active zonesets in the Active Zonesets data window, open the topology display, and then click the Active Zonesets data window tab.

The Configured Zonesets data window uses display conventions for expanding and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded. Click this handle or double-click the following entries to expand or collapse them.

■

■

■

A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.

A zone entry expands to show its members by port number, World Wide Name, or Fibre

Channel address.

The alias entry expands to show its entries.

Figure 23: Configured Zonesets data window


65

Switch Manager

Configuring port threshold alarms

You can configure the switch to generate alarms for selected events. Configuring an alarm involves choosing an event type, rising and falling triggers, a sample window, and finally enabling or disabling the alarm.

1. Select Switch > Port Threshold Alarm Configuration. The Port Threshold Alarm

Configuration dialog box is displayed ( Figure 24 ).

The Port Threshold Alarm Configuration dialog box prompts you to enable or disable all alarms, select an event, set triggers, set a sample window and enable or disable an individual alarm.

66

Figure 24: Port Threshold Alarm Configuration dialog box

2. Check Enable All Port Threshold Alarms to enable monitoring for all the individual alarm types that are enabled.

The Enable All Port Threshold Alarms check box is the master control for the individual alarms. For example, the switch monitors CRC errors only if both CRC Error

Enable and Enable All Port Threshold Alarms are checked.

3. Select an event type from the Port Threshold Alarm drop-down list. Choose from the following options:

— CRC error monitoring

— Decode error monitoring

— Login monitoring

— Logout monitoring

— Loss of signal monitoring

4. Check Enable to make the alarm eligible for use.

5. Enter a value for the rising trigger.

A rising trigger alarm is generated when the event count per interval exceeds the rising trigger. The switch does not generate another rising trigger alarm for that event until the count descends below the falling trigger and rises again above the rising trigger. Consider the example in

Figure 25 .

6. Enter a value for the falling trigger.

A falling trigger alarm is generated when the event count per interval descends below the falling trigger.

Note: The switch disables a port if a rising trigger alarm is not cleared after three consecutive sample windows.


Switch Manager

Generate rising trigger alarm; eligibility ends

Generate rising trigger alarm; eligibility ends

Event

Count

Rising

Trigger

Generate falling trigger alarm; eligibility is reset

Falling

Trigger

Sample Window

Figure 25: Port Threshold Alarm example

7. Enter a sample window in seconds.

The sample window defines the period of time in which to count events.

8. Repeat step 3 through

step 7 for each alarm you want to configure or enable.

9. Click OK.

Exporting name server information to a file

To save name server information to a file, open the topology display and do the following:

1. Select one or more switches. If no switches are selected, name server information is gathered for all switches.

2. Select Switch > Export Name Server. The Save dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter a file name in the Save dialog box.

4. Click Save.

Paging a switch

You can use the beacon feature to page a switch. The beacon feature causes all Logged-In

LEDs to flash, making it easier to recognize.

To page a switch, select Switch > Toggle Beacon.

To cancel the beacon, reselect Toggle Beacon.


67

Switch Manager

Setting the date/time and NTP client

The Date/Time and Network Time Protocol (NTP) dialog box enables you to set the date and time manually on a switch, or to enable NTP Client to synchronize the date and time on the switch with an NTP server. Enabling the NTP client ensures the consistency of date and time stamps in alarms and log entries. An Ethernet connection to an NTP server is required.

1. Select a switch in the topology display, and open the faceplate display.

2. Select Switch > Set Date/Time. The Switch Date/Time dialog box is displayed.

3. Choose one of the following:

— Enter the year, month, day and time in the Switch Date/Time dialog box, and then click OK. The new date and time take effect immediately.

— Click NTP Client Enabled to enable the switch to synchronize its time with an NTP server. Enter the IP address of the NTP server. Ethernet connection to NTP server is required.

4. Click OK.

Resetting a switch

Resetting a switch reboots the switch using configuration parameters in memory. Depending on the reset type, a switch reset may or may not include a Power On Self Test.

Table 12

describes the types of switch resets.

Table 12: Switch resets

Type

Reset without Power On Self

Test (POST)

Hard reset

Description

Resets a switch without a Power On Self Test. This reset activates the pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic.

Resets a switch with a Power On Self Test. This reset activates the pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic.

1. Select the switch to be reset, and then open the faceplate display.

2. Select Switch > Reset Switch.

— Select Reset to perform a standard reset.

— Select Hard Reset to perform a hard reset.

Configuring a switch

Switch configuration is divided into areas:

■

Configuration wizard

■

■

Switch properties

Network properties

Switch properties specify switch-wide Fibre Channel settings and Network properties specify

Ethernet and SNMP settings.

Each of these configuration options are discussed in the following sections.

68


Switch Manager

Configuration wizard

The Configuration wizard is a series of dialog boxes you can use to configure the IP address and other basic parameters on new or replacement switches. Switch Manager detects the first time use and present the Initial Start Dialog—Switch Manager dialog box, from which the

Configuration wizard can be launched. You can also launch the Configuration wizard from the

Wizards menu in either the topology display or the faceplate display by opening the Wizards menu, and then selecting Configuration Wizard.

Switch properties

To open the Switch Properties dialog box, either select a switch in the topology display or open the faceplate display for the switch you are configuring, and then select Switch > Switch

Properties. You may also right-click a switch graphic in the topology display or faceplate display, and then select Switch Properties from the menu.

Use the Switch Properties dialog box to change the following switch configuration parameters:

■

Symbolic Name parameter

■

■

■

Administrative State parameter

Domain ID and Domain ID Lock parameters

Broadcast Support parameter

■

■

■

In-band Management parameter

Interop Mode parameter

Legacy Address Format parameter

The timeout values are displayed only for reference purposes when the switch is online; they become active when the switch is taken offline. After making changes, click OK to put the new values into effect.

Figure 26: Switch Properties dialog box

Symbolic Name parameter

The symbolic name is a user-defined name of up to 32 characters that identifies the switch.

The symbolic name is used in the topology and faceplate displays, as well as many data windows to more easily identify switches. Illegal characters are the pound sign (#), semi-colon

(;), and comma (,).


69

Switch Manager

70

Administrative State parameter

The switch administrative state determines the operational state of the switch. The switch administrative state exists in two forms: the configured administrative state and the current administrative state.

■

The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch configuration and is preserved across switch resets. Switch Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state. The configured administrative state is displayed in the

Switch Properties dialog box.

■

The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the switch for temporary purposes and is not retained across switch resets. The current administrative state is set

using the Set Switch command. See the “ Set command ” on page 135.

Table 13 describes the administrative state values.

Table 13: Switch administrative states

Online

Offline

Parameter

Diagnostics

The switch is available.

The switch is unavailable.

Description

The switch is in diagnostics mode, is unavailable, and tests can then be run on all ports of the switch.

Domain ID and Domain ID Lock parameters

The domain ID is a unique Fibre Channel identifier for the switch. The Fibre Channel address consists of the domain ID, port ID, and the Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (ALPA). The maximum number of switches within a fabric is 239 with each switch having a unique domain

ID.

Switches come from the factory with the domain IDs unlocked. This means that if there is a domain ID conflict in the fabric, the switch with the highest principal priority, or the principal switch, reassigns any domain ID conflicts and establishes the fabric. If you lock the domain ID on a switch and a domain ID conflict occurs, one of the switches isolates as a separate fabric

and the Logged-In LEDs on both switches flash to show the affected ports. See the “ Set

Config command ” on page 137 for information about the switch keyword and the Domain ID

Lock and Principal Priority parameters.

If you connect a new switch to an existing fabric with its domain ID unlocked, and a domain conflict occurs, the new switch isolates as a separate fabric. However, you can remedy this by resetting the new switch or taking it offline then back online. The principal switch reassigns the domain ID and the switch joins the fabric.

Note: Domain ID reassignment is not reflected in zoning that is defined by domain ID and port number pair. You must reconfigure zones that are affected by domain ID reassignment.

Broadcast Support parameter

Broadcast is supported, which allows for TCP/IP support. Broadcast is implemented using the proposed standard specified in Multi-Switch Broadcast for FC-SW-3, T11 Presentation

Number T11/02-031v0. Fabric Shortest Path First (FSPF) is used to set up a fabric spanning tree used in transmission of broadcast frames. Broadcast frames are retransmitted on all online

F_Ports. Broadcast zoning is supported with Access Control List (ACL) hard zones. When a broadcast frame is received, these hard zones are enforced at the F_Port. If the originator of


Switch Manager the broadcast is in a hard zone, the frame is retransmitted on all online F_Ports within the hard zone. If the originator of the broadcast frame is not in a hard zone, the frame is retransmitted on online F_Ports that are not in a hard zone. The default setting is disabled.

In-band Management parameter

In-band Management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links using Switch

Manager, SNMP, management server. The switch comes from the factory with in-band management enabled. If you disable in-band management on a particular switch, you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct Ethernet or serial connection. In-band Management is not supported at this time.

Interop Mode parameter

When a zone set is activated, this and other FC-SW-2 compliant switches propagate the active zone set to all switches in the fabric. Some non-FC-SW-2 compliant switches propagate not only the active zone set, but the entire zoning database. Disabling the Interop Mode parameter causes the Switch switch to propagate the zoning database, and therefore, interoperate with non-FC-SW-2 switches. For FC-SW-2 compliant fabrics, the Interop Mode parameter should be enabled. Interop Mode is not supported at this time.

Legacy Address Format parameter

Legacy Address Format should be enabled only to permit interoperation with certain older non-FC-SW-2 switches. Enabling this setting under other circumstances disables zoning that is defined by domain ID and port number. This setting is available only when the Interop

Mode setting is disabled. Contact your HP authorized service provider for assistance in using this feature. Legacy Address Format is not supported at this time.

Timeout Values parameters

The switch timeout values determine the timeout values for all ports on the switch.

Table 14

describes the switch timeout parameters. The timeout values must be the same for all switches in the fabric.

Note: Mismatched timeout values disrupt the fabric. These values should not be changed unless absolutely necessary. The switch must be offline to change the values. Use the Switch Properties dialog box to take the switch offline.

Table 14: Timeout values

Parameter

R_A_TOV

E_D_TOV

Description

Resource Allocation Timeout: Represents the maximum time a frame could be delayed in the fabric and still be delivered. The default is

10000 milliseconds.

Error Detect Timeout: Represents the maximum round trip time that an operation between two N_Ports could require. The default is 2000 milliseconds.


71

Switch Manager

Network properties

Use the Network Properties dialog box to change the following network settings:

■

IP Configuration parameters

■

■

SNMP Configuration parameters

SNMP Trap Configuration

■

Remote Logging parameter

1. Select a switch in the topology display or open the faceplate display.

2. Select Switch > Network Properties. The Network Properties dialog box is displayed

(

Figure 27

).

3. After making changes, click OK to put the new values into effect.

Note: Read Community, Trap Community, and Write Community are similar to passwords and are write-only boxes. Current settings are not displayed.

72

Figure 27: Network Properties dialog box

IP Configuration parameters

The IP configuration identifies the switch on the Ethernet network and determines which network discovery method to use.

Table 15 describes the IP configuration parameters.


Switch Manager

Table 15: IP configuration parameters

Parameter

Network

Discovery

IP Address

Subnet mask

Gateway

Description

Use one of the following methods to assign the IP address:

■

■

■

■

Static—Uses the IP configuration parameters entered in the Switch

Properties dialog box.

BootP—Acquires the IP configuration from a BootP server.

RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol)—Acquires the IP address from an RARP server. An RARP request is broadcast with up to three retries, each at 5 second intervals. If no IP address is obtained, the switch reverts to the previously configured IP address.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)—Acquires the IP configuration from a DHCP server. If no satisfactory lease is obtained, the

DHCP client attempts to use the previously configured lease. If the previous lease cannot be used, no IP address is assigned to this switch in order to avoid an IP address conflict. The DHCP server must then be made available.

If a BootP, RARP, or DHCP server is not available, the switch attempts to use a previously assigned valid lease. If no lease was ever assigned, the switch attempts to use the previously assigned static IP address.

Internet Protocol (IP) address for the Ethernet port. Default: 10.0.0.1.

Subnet mask address for the Ethernet port. Default value: 255.0.0.0.

IP gateway address. Default: 10.0.0.254.

SNMP Configuration parameters

The SNMP configuration defines how authentication traps are managed. Table 16

describes the SNMP configuration parameters. Illegal characters for the user-defined boxes are the pound sign (#), semi-colon (;), and comma (,).

Table 16: SNMP Configuration parameter

Parameter

SNMP Enabled

Contact

Read Community

Trap Community

SNMP Proxy

Description

Enables or disables SNMP communication with other switches in the fabric.

Specifies the name (up to 64 characters) of the person who is to be contacted to respond to trap events.

The default is “undefined”.

Read community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an SNMP agent to read information from the switch. This is a write-only box. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same.

The default is “public”.

Trap community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an SNMP agent to receive traps. This is a write-only box. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same.

The default is “public”.

If enabled, you can use SNMP to monitor and configure any switch in the fabric.


73

Switch Manager

Table 16: SNMP Configuration parameter (Continued)

Parameter

Location

Authentication Trap

Write Community

Description

Specifies the name (up to 64 characters) for the switch location.

The default is “undefined”.

Enables or disables the reporting of SNMP authentication failures. If enabled, a notification trap is sent when incorrect community string values are used.

The default is “False”.

Write community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an SNMP agent to write information to the switch.

This is a write-only box. The value on the switch and the

SNMP management server must be the same.

The default is “private”.

SNMP Trap Configuration

The SNMP trap configuration defines how traps are set. Choose from the tabs Trap1 – Trap 5

to configure each trap. Table 17 describes the SNMP configuration parameters.

Table 17: SNMP trap configuration parameters

Parameter

Trap Version

Trap 1 Enabled

Trap Address*

Description

Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) with which to format traps.

Enables or disables the trap.

If disabled, traps are not configurable.

Specifies the IP address to which SNMP traps are sent.

A maximum of 5 trap addresses are supported.

The default address for trap 1 is 10.0.0.254.

The default address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0.

Trap Port*

Trap Severity

The port number on which the trap is sent.

The default is 162.

Specifies a severity level to assign to the trap.

Open the menu and choose a level. The Trap 1 Enabled check box on the Network Properties dialog box must be enabled to access this menu.

Trap severity levels include Unknown, Emergency, Alert, Critical,

Error, Warning, Notify, Info, Debug, and Mark.

* Trap address (other than 0.0.0.0) and trap port combinations must be unique. For example, if trap 1 and trap 2 have the same address, they must have different port values. Similarly, if trap

1 and 2 have the same port value, they must have different addresses.

Remote Logging parameter

The Remote Logging (syslog) parameter enables saving of the log information to a remote host that supports the syslog protocol. When enabled, the log entries are sent to the syslog host at the IP address entered in the Logging Host IP Address box. Log entries are saved in the internal switch log whether this feature is enabled or not.

74


Switch Manager

To save log information to a remote host, you must edit the syslog.conf

file (located on the remote host) and then restart the syslog daemon. Consult your operating system documentation for information on how to configure Remote Logging. The syslog.conf

file on the remote host must contain an entry that specifies the name of the log file in which to save error messages.

Add the following line to the syslog.conf

file: local0.info <tab> /var/adm/messages.name

A

<tab>

separates the Selector ( local0.info

) and Action (

/var/adm/messages/ messages.name

).

Archiving a switch configuration

You can create an XML archive file containing the configuration parameters. Basically, any data received by Switch Manager is archived. However, user accounts and passwords are available only through the command line interface, and are not received by Switch Manager, and thus are not archived. Archived parameters include the following:

■

■

Switch properties and statistics

IP configuration

■

■

■

■

SNMP configuration

Port properties and statistics

Alarm configuration


This archive file can be used to restore the configuration on the same switch or on a replacement switch. You can also use the archive file as a template for configuring new switches to add to a fabric. User account information is not archived. The archive can be used

later to restore the switch. See “ Restoring a switch configuration ” on page 75 for more

information.

1. Select Switch > Archive. The Save dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter a file name in the Save dialog box.

3. Click Save.

Restoring a switch configuration

Restoring a switch loads the archived switch configuration parameters to the switch. The

switch configuration must be archived before it can be restored. See “ Archiving a switch configuration ” on page 75 for more information.

Caution: The switch being restored should be physically disconnected from the fabric.

Restoring a switch in a fabric can severely disrupt the fabric. After the restore process is complete, the switch can be reconnected to the fabric.

1. Log in to the fabric through the switch you want to restore.

2. Select Switch > Restore. The Restore dialog box is displayed (

Figure 28 ).

The Restore dialog box offers a Full Restore and a Selective Restore tab.


75

Switch Manager

76

Figure 28: Restore dialog boxes – Full and Selective

3. Enter the archive file name or browse for the file. This archive file must be one that was produced by the Switch Manager Archive function. Configuration backup files created with the Config Backup CLI command are not compatible with the Switch Manager

Restore function.

4. To restore all configuration settings, click the Full Restore tab, and then click Restore.

To restore selected configuration settings, click the Selective Restore tab and check one or more of the following boxes, and then click Restore:

— Network Properties—Restores all settings presented in the Network Properties

dialog box except the IP address. Refer to“ Network properties ” on page 72.

— IP Address—Restores switch IP address in addition to the other network properties.

— Switch Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Switch Properties dialog box

except the domain ID. Refer to“ Switch properties ” on page 69.

— Domain ID—Restores switch domain ID in addition to the other switch properties.

— Port Properties—Restores all settings presented in the Port Properties dialog box.

Refer to“ Configuring ports ” on page 85.

— Configured Zoning—Restores all zone sets, zones, and aliases in the switches zoning database.

5. If you select the Configured Zoning or Full Restore option and the file contains zone sets, a dialog box prompts you to activate one of those zone sets.

6. Click Yes.

7. Select a zone set from the drop-down list in the Select Zone Set to be Activated dialog box.

8. Click OK and view the results in the top pane of the Restore dialog box.


Switch Manager

Restoring the factory default configuration

You can restore the switch and port configuration settings to the factory default values. To restore the factory configuration on a switch, select Switch > Restore Factory Defaults.

Table 18 lists the factory default switch configuration settings.

Restoring the switch to the factory default configuration does not restore the account name and password settings. To restore user accounts, select Maintenance > Reset Password File.

Refer to “Recovering a Switch” in the Installation Guide for your switch for information about maintenance mode and the Maintenance menu.

Table 18: Factory default configuration settings

Symbolic Name

Administrative State

Setting

Domain ID

Domain ID Lock

In-band Management

Broadcast Support

Resource Allocation Timeout (R_A_TOV)

Interop Mode

I/O Stream Guard

Device Scan Enabled

Interop Credits

Error Detect Timeout (E_D_TOV)

SNMP Enabled

SNMP Proxy

IP Address

Subnet Mask Address

Gateway Address

Network Discovery

Remote Logging

Remote Logging Host Ip Address

Contact

Location

Trap Enabled

Trap Port

Trap Address

Trap Community

Read Community

Write Community

Port State

Port Speed

Port Type

Value

2/8q FC Switch

Online

1

False

True

Enable

10000 milliseconds

True (not supported)

Disabled

True

0 (not supported)

2000 milliseconds

True

True

10.0.0.1

255.0.0.0

10.0.0.254

Static

False

10.0.0.254

Undefined

Undefined

False

162

Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2-5: 0.0.0.0

Public

Public

Private

Online

Auto-detect

GL


77

Switch Manager

Downloading a support file

The Download Support File menu option assembles all log files and switch memory data into a core dump file ( dump_support.tgz zip

). This file can be sent to technical support personnel for troubleshooting switch problems. The menu option is not displayed for switches that don't support the download support file function.

1. Select Switch > Download Support File. The Download Support File dialog box is displayed.

2. Click Browse to define a location for the support file or type the path in the Text box.

3. Click Start to begin the process of creating and downloading the support file to your workstation.

4. Observe the status in the Status area.

5. After the support file is saved to your workstation, click Close.

Installing firmware

Installing firmware involves loading, unpacking, and activating the firmware image on the switch. Switch Manager does this in one operation. To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric, ensure that all switches are running the same version of firmware.

The switch only supports one firmware image, and thus there is no inactive firmware image.

The pending firmware version only differs from the active version during the brief period while the switch is resetting to activate the firmware. Firmware management tools enable you to install and activate new firmware.

You can load and activate firmware on an operating switch without disrupting data traffic or having to re-initialize attached devices. If you attempt to perform a non-disruptive activation without satisfying the following conditions, the switch performs a disruptive activation:

■

No changes are being made to switches in the fabric including powering up, powering down, and switch configuration changes.

■

No port in the fabric is in the diagnostic state.

■

■

No zoning changes are being made in the fabric.

No changes are being made to attached devices including powering up, powering down, disconnecting, connecting, and HBA configuration changes.

Ports that are stable when the non-disruptive activation begins and then change states, are reset. When the non-disruptive activation is complete, Switch Manager sessions reconnect automatically. However, Telnet sessions must be restarted manually.

Select a switch in the topology display and double-click to open the Faceplate display.

6. Select Switch > Load Firmware. The Firmware Upload dialog box is displayed.

7. Click Select to browse and then select the firmware file to be uploaded.

8. Click Start to begin the firmware load process.

9. Click OK to continue firmware installation or click Cancel to cancel the firmware installation.

Switch Manager attempts a hot reset, if possible, to activate the firmware without disrupting data traffic. During a non-disruptive activation, all Logged-In LEDs are extinguished for several seconds. If a non-disruptive activation is not possible, Switch Manager gives you the opportunity to reset the switch and perform a disruptive activation.

78


Switch Manager

Displaying hardware status

To display a summary of the hardware status information in a popup text box, rest the cursor over the chassis LED cluster in the faceplate display.

■

■

■

Input Power LED—Indicates the voltage status of the switch.

Heartbeat LED—Indicates the status of the switch processor and the results of the POST.

System Fault LED—Indicates an over temperature condition or a POST error.

Figure 29: Hardware status LEDs


79

Switch Manager

Managing ports

This section describes the following tasks that manage ports and devices:

■

■

Displaying port information , page 80

Configuring ports , page 85

■

■

Resetting a port , page 89

Testing ports , page 89

Displaying port information

Port information is available primarily in the faceplate display (

Figure 30 ) and includes:

■

■

Port status


■

■



The faceplate display data windows provide information and statistics for switches and ports.

Use the topology display to view status information on fabrics, switches, and links between switches.

Port status

Figure 30: Faceplate Display – Port Information data window

To display port number and status information for a port, position the cursor over a port on the faceplate display. The status information changes depending on the View menu option.

■

■

Displaying port types

Displaying port operational states

■

■

Displaying port speeds

Displaying transceiver media status

80


Switch Manager

Displaying port types

To display port type status, select View > View Port Types.

Table 19 lists the possible port

types and their meanings.

Table 19: Port type

State

F_Port

FL_Port

G_Port

GL_Port

Donor

Description

Fabric port—Supports a single public device (N_Port).

Fabric loop port—Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up to

126 public devices (NL_Port).

Generic port—Self discovers as an F_Port.

Generic loop port—Self discovers as an F_Port or an FL_Port. GL_Port is the default port type. A single device on a public loop attempts to configure as an

F_Port first, if that fails it attempts to configure as an FL_Port.

Donor port—Allows buffer credits to be used by another port.

Displaying port operational states

To display the operational state on each port, select View > View Port States. Table 20 lists

the possible operational states and their meanings. The port operational state refers to actual port state and not the administrative state you may have assigned.

On

Ia

Off

Dia

Dn

Table 20: Port operational states

State Description

Online—Port is active and ready to send data.

Inactive—Port operational state is offline, but administrative state is online.

Offline—Port is active, can receive signal, but cannot accept a device login.

Diagnostics—Port is in diagnostics mode in preparation for testing

Down—Port is disabled, power is removed from the lasers, and cannot be logged in.

Displaying port speeds

To display the speed of each port, select View > View Port Speeds.

Table 21 lists the possible

port speeds.

Table 21: Port speeds

State

Au

1Gbps

2Gbps

Description

Auto-detect

1 Gbps transmission speed (not supported)

2 Gbps transmission speed

Displaying transceiver media status

To display transceiver media status, select View > View Port Media.

Table 22

lists the port media states and their meanings.


81

Switch Manager

Table 22: Port/transceiver states

State

Optical SFP, Online (Green)

Description

None

Optical SFP, Offline (Gray)

Empty port, no transceiver installed


The Port Statistics data window displays statistics about port performance. To open the Port

Statistics window, select one or more ports in the faceplate display, and then click the Port

Stats tab below the data window.

Table 23

describes the Port Statistics data window entries.

The Statistics menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and provides different ways to view detailed port information. Click the down arrow to open the menu. Open the menu and then select Absolute to view the total count of statistics since the last switch or port reset. Select Rate to view the number of statistics counted per second over the polling period.

Select Baseline to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set.

When viewing baseline statistics, click Clear Baseline to set the current baseline. The baseline is also set when the switch status changes from unreachable to reachable.

Table 23: Port Statistics data window entries

Entry

Start Time

End Time

Total Time

Al Init

AL Init Error

Bad Frames

Class 3 Frames In

Class 3 Frames Out

Class 3 Toss

Class 3 Words In

Class 3 Words Out

Decode Errors

Ep Connects

Description

The beginning of the period over which the statistics apply. The start time for the Absolute view is not applicable. The start time for the Rate view is the beginning of polling interval. The start time for the Baseline view is the last time the baseline was set.

The last time the statistics were updated on the display.

Total time period from start time to end time.

Number of times the port entered the initialization state.

Number of times the port entered initialization and the initialization failed. Increments count when port has a sync loss.

Number of frames that were truncated due to a loss of sync or the frame did not end with an EOF.

Number of class 3 frames received by this port.

Number of class 3 frames transmitted by this port.

Number of class 3 sequences discarded by this port. A sequence can be discarded because of detection of a missing frame (based on

SEQ_CNT), detection of an E_D_TOV timeout, receiving a reject frame, receiving frames for a stopped sequence, or other causes.

Number of class 3 words received by this port.

Number of class 3 words transmitted by this port.

Number of invalid transmission words detected during decoding.

Decoding is from the 10-bit characters and special K characters.

Number of E_Port logins.

82


Switch Manager

Table 23: Port Statistics data window entries (Continued)

FBusy

Flow Errors

FReject

Invalid CRC

Invalid Destination

Address

Link Failures

LIP (AL_PD,AL_PS)

LIP(f7,AL_PS)

LIP(f7,f7)

Entry

LIP(f8,AL_PS)

Login Count

Logout Count

Loop Timeouts

Loss Of Sync

Description

Number of class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames generated by this port in response to incoming frames. This usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N_port that is preventing delivery of this frame.

Number of times a frame is received and all the switch ports receive buffers are full. The normal Fabric Login exchange of flow control credit should prevent this from occurring. The frame is discarded.

Number of frames, from devices, that have been rejected. Frames can be rejected for any of a large number of reasons.

Number of invalid Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) frames detected.

Number of address identifier (S_ID, D_ID) errors. AL_PA equals non-zero AL_PA found on F_Port.

Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link failure is a loss of synchronization or by loss of signal while not in the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to attempt to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established, a link failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link failure.

Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific) resets performed.

Used to reinitialize the loop. An L_port, identified by AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and is trying to restore the loop.

A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire an AL_PA.

Denotes a loop failure detected by the L_port identified by AL_PS.

Number of device logins that have occurred on the switch.

Number of device logouts that have occurred on the switch.

Number of loop timeouts.

Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an invalid transmission word.

Number of bad primitives received by the port.

Primitive Sequence

Errors

Rx Link Resets

Rx Offline Sequences

Total Errors

Total Link Resets

Total LIPs Received

Total LIPs Transmitted

Tx Offline Sequences

Total Rx Frames

Total Rx Words

Total Tx Frames

Total Tx Words

Tx Link Resets

Total Offline

Sequences

Number of link reset primitives received from an attached device.

Number of offline sequence primitives received by the port.

Total number of primitive and non-primitive port link errors.

Number of link-reset primitives the transmitted by the port.

Number of loop initialization primitive frames received.

Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted.

Number of offline primitives transmitted by the port.

Total number of frames received by the port.

Total number of words received by the port.

Total number of frames transmitted by the port.

Total number of words transmitted by the port.

Number of link reset primitives sent from this port to an attached port.

Total number of offline sequences transmitted and received by the port.


83

Switch Manager


The Port Information data window displays port detail information for the selected port. To open the Port Information data window, click the Port Info tab below the data window in the faceplate display.

Table 24 describes the Port Information data window entries.

Table 24: Port Information data window entries

Port Address

Administrative Port

Type

Entry Description

Port Fibre Channel address.

The port type (G, GL, F, FL, or Donor) that the port is configured as.

This value is persistent; it is maintained during a switch reset. During a port auto-configuration it is used to determine which operational port states are allowed.

Operational Port Type The port type that is currently active. This is set during port auto-configuration based on the administrative port type.

Administrative Port

State

The port state (Online, Offline, Diagnostics, or Down) which has been set by the user. This state may be different from the configured administrative state if the user has not saved it in the switch configuration. This state is used at the time it is set to try to set the port operational state. This value is not persistent and is lost on a switch reset.

Operational Port State The port state that is currently active. This value may be different from the administrative port state, for example due to an error condition.

Configured

Administrative Port

State

The port state (Online, Offline, Diagnostics, or Down) which is saved in the switch configuration, either by the user or at the factory. This value is persistent; it is maintained during a switch reset, and is used after a reset to set the port operational state.

Logged In

MFS Mode

I/O Stream Guard

Administrative Port

Speed

Indicates whether logged in or not.

Port tuning indicator.

Whether RSCN suppression is enabled or disabled.

The speed requested by the user.

Operational Port

Speed

Interop Credits

Device Scan

The speed actually being used by the port.

Symbolic Name

Ext Credits Requested

Credits to Donate

Donor Group

Valid Donor Groups

Medium

Whether Interop credits have been set. (not supported)

Queries the connected device during login for FC-4 descriptor information. Disable this parameter only if the scan creates a conflict with the connected device.

Port symbolic name.

Whether extended credits have been requested for ports.

The number of credits available to be donated by the selected port.

The donor group of the selected port.

The number of separate groups within which extended credits may be donated and assigned.

The transceiver type.

84


Switch Manager


The Name Server data window displays information about devices (hosts and storage targets) connected to the switch. To open the Name Server data window from the topology or faceplate display, click the Name Server tab below the data window. In the topology display, if no switches are selected, the name-server entries for the entire fabric are displayed in the data window; if switches are selected, only the devices attached to the selected switches are displayed. In the faceplate display, only the devices attached the switch being viewed are

displayed. See Table 10

for a description of the Name Server data window entries.

Configuring ports

The port settings or characteristics are configured using the Port menu and the Port Properties dialog box as shown in

Figure 31 . To open the Port Properties dialog box for a port, select one

or more ports, and then select Port > Port Properties.

Figure 31: Port Properties dialog box

The Port Properties dialog box displays the switch name and the selected port(s). Use the Port

Properties dialog box to view and change the following:

■

■

■

■

Port States parameters

Port Speed parameters

Port Type parameters

Interoperability Credits parameters

■

■

■

■

I/O Stream Guard parameters

Device Scan parameter

Changing the port symbolic name

Extending port credits


85

Switch Manager

Port States parameters

The port administrative state determines the operational state of a port. The port administrative state exists in two forms:

■

The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch configuration and is preserved across switch resets. Switch Manager always makes changes to the configured administrative state.

■

The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the port for temporary purposes and is not preserved across switch resets. The current administrative state is set

using the Set Port command. See the “ Set Port command ” on page 146.

Table 25 describes the port administrative states.

1. Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.

2. Select Port > Port Properties. The Port Properties dialog box is displayed.

3. Click the Port States option that corresponds to the port state you want.

4. Click OK.

Table 25: Port states

State

Online

Offline

Diagnostics

Down

Description

Activates and prepares port to send data.

Prevents port from receiving signal and accepting a device login.

Prepares port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login.

Disables the port.

Port Speed parameters

Ports are capable of transmitting and receiving at 1 or 2 Gbps. The ports can be configured for either transmission speed or to sense the transmission speed of the device to which it is

connected. Table 26 describes the port speeds.



3. Click the Port Speed option that corresponds to the port speed you want.

4. Click OK.

Table 26: Port speeds

State

Auto-Detect

1 Gbps

2 Gbps

Description

Matches the transmission speed of the connected device. This is the default.

Sets the transmission speed to 1 Gbps.

Sets the transmission speed to 2 Gbps.

86


Switch Manager

Port Type parameters

The ports can be configured to self-discover the proper type to match the device or switch to which it is connected.

Table 27

describes the port types.



3. Click the Port Type option for the port type you want.

4. Click OK.

Table 27: Port types

State

F_Port

FL_Port

G_Port

GL_Port

Donor

Description

Fabric port—Supports a single public device (N_Port).

Fabric loop port—Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up to 126 public devices (NL_Port).

Generic port—Self discovers as an F_Port.

Generic loop port—Self discovers as an F_Port or an FL_Port. GL_Port is the default port type. A single device on a public loop attempts to configure as an F_Port first; if that fails it attempts to configure as an

FL_Port.

Donor port—Allows buffer credits to be used by another port.

Interoperability Credits parameters

Note: Interoperability Credits is not supported at this time.

Switches negotiate with other switches to resolve differences in the number of port buffer credits.

I/O Stream Guard parameters

The I/O Stream Guard feature suppresses the generation of Registered State Change

Notification (RSCN) messages on a port basis. I/O Stream Guard should be enabled only on ports connected to initiator devices.

To suppress the generation of RSCN messages for the selected port, open the Port menu, and then click the Enable option in the I/O Stream Guard area of the Port Properties dialog box.

Device Scan parameter

The Device Scan feature queries the connected device during login for FC-4 descriptor information. Disable this parameter only if the scan creates a conflict with the connected device.

Changing the port symbolic name

To change the symbolic name of a port from the faceplate display:

1. Open the faceplate display and then select a port.

2. Select Port > Port Symbolic Name. The Port Symbolic Name dialog box is displayed.


87

Switch Manager

3. Select one of the following in the Port Symbolic Name dialog box:

— Enter a new name for the port in the Set Port Symbolic Name box.

— Check the Restore Default Port Symbolic Name check box to restore the default name.

4. Click OK.

Extending port credits

Each port is supported by a data-buffer with a 16-credit capacity; that is, 16 maximum sized frames. For fiber optic cables, this enables full bandwidth service over a distance of 10 kilometers at 2 Gbps. For fiber optic cables, this enables full bandwidth service over a distance of 13 kilometers at 2 Gbps (1.2 credits/Km). Longer distances can be spanned at full bandwidth by borrowing credits from designated donor ports thus pooling the buffer capacities. This is called credit extension. Each donor port contributes 15 credits to the pool from which the recipient ports can draw. The recipient port also loses one credit in the process.

For example, one donor port contributes 15 credits to the pool from which a recipient draws for a total of 30 credits (15+15). This provides approximately 25 Km at 2 Gbps (30÷1.2).

To extend credits, select Wizards > Ext Credit Wizard. The Extended Credit Wizard leads you through the following process to extend credits based on transmission distance requirements:

1. Extended Distance on Switch—Explains the concepts and principles of extending port credits. Click Next.

2. Extended Distance Requirements—Specify speed and distance requirements for each port.

Click Next.

3. Designate Donor Ports—Select available ports and then click >> to move the port into the

Selected Donor Port column (

Figure 32 ). Match the number of ports needed with the

number of designated donor ports. Click Next.

88

Figure 32: Designating donor ports


Switch Manager

4. Verify Requested Changes—Review the extended distance requests and the selected donor ports. Click Finish to apply the changes, and redistribute the credits.

Note: As credits are used, the Logged-In LEDs on the corresponding donor ports illuminate continuously. In addition, donor port Activity LEDs reflect the same traffic as the recipient port.

Donor ports whose credits are being used are unavailable to devices that are connected to them.

Resetting a port

The Reset Port option reinitializes the port using the saved configuration.

1. In the faceplate display, select the port(s) to be reset.

2. Select Port > Reset Port.

Testing ports

The port loopback tests verify correct port operation by sending a frame out through the loop, and then verifying that the frame received matches the frame that was sent. Only one port can be tested at a time for each type of test. The Port Loopback Test dialog box presents the following loopback tests:

■

■

SerDes level (Internal)—The SerDes level test verifies port circuitry. The SerDes level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip and back to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received. This test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore, disrupts communication.

SFP level (External)—The SFP level test verifies port circuitry. The SFP level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip, through the SFP transceiver fitted with an external loopback plug, and back to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the test frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received. This test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore, disrupts communication.

■

Node-to-Node (Online)—The Node-to-Node test verifies communications between the port and its device node or device loop. The port being tested must be online and connected to a remote device. The port passes the test if the frame that was sent by the

ASIC matches the frame that was received. This test does not disrupt communication on the selected port. This test requires that the port be online, and therefore, does not disrupt communication.

To run the internal, external, or online port loopback test on a port:

1. In the faceplate display, select the port to be tested, and then select Port > Port Loopback

Test. The Port Loopback Test dialog box is displayed ( Figure 33 ).


89

Switch Manager

90

Figure 33: Port Loopback Test dialog box

2. Select the type of loopback test to be run (Internal, External, or Online) in the Test

Selection area.

If you choose the internal or external test, Switch Manager prompts you to confirm that the port state needs to be changed to the diagnostic state.

3. Click OK.

4. Enter the frame count in the Frame Count box.

5. Enter the frame size in the Frame Size (40-492) box.

6. Select a Test Pattern option.

You may use the default pattern or enter an 8-digit pattern (hex). For online test, you can select the Terminate Test Upon Error check box if you want the test to stop should it encounter an error.

7. Click Start Test.

The Test Results area displays the test status, number of frames sent, and number of errors found.

8. Click Close.


Switch Manager

Graphing port performance

The HP StorageWorks Fabric View application displays port performance using graphs. HP

StorageWorks Fabric View plots data communication rates and total errors for selected ports

as shown in Figure 34 . When graphing data communication rates, you can choose either

frames/second or KB/second.

Fabric status is displayed in text format after the fabric name in the fabric tree. The color of the icon indicates the current connection status as normal (green), warning (yellow), critical (red), or unmanageable (blue).

Figure 34: Fabric View graphs

This section describes the following:

■

Starting HP StorageWorks Fabric View , page 91

■

Exiting HP StorageWorks Fabric View , page 92

■

■

■

Saving and opening Fabric View files , page 92

Changing the Default Fabric View File encryption key , page 93

Setting HP StorageWorks Fabric View preferences , page 93

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Setting the polling frequency , page 93

Displaying graphs , page 94

Arranging graphs in the display , page 94

Customizing graphs , page 94

Printing graphs , page 96

Rescaling a selected graph , page 96

Saving graph statistics to a file , page 96

Starting HP StorageWorks Fabric View

To start HP StorageWorks Fabric View from within Switch Manager, open the topology display and then select Fabric > Start Fabric View.


91

Switch Manager

Exiting HP StorageWorks Fabric View

To exit a HP StorageWorks Fabric View session, select File > Exit. The current fabric view is automatically saved to your default fabric view file upon exit, if you have defined an encryption key. The key is encrypted and saved with your default fabric view file. A fabric view file contains the set of fabrics that have been added and the graphs that have been opened during a HP StorageWorks Fabric View session. If you have not yet defined an encryption key, the Save Default Fabric View File dialog box (

Figure 2 ) prompts you to save the current

fabric view as the default fabric view file. See “ Changing the encryption key for the default fabric view file” on page 23

for information about defining and changing this encryption key.

In the Save Default Fabric View File dialog box, enter an encryption key in the Default

Fabric File Encryption Key box. Re-enter the encryption key in the Re-enter Encryption

Key to Confirm box. Click OK to save the current set of HP StorageWorks Fabric View fabrics to the default fabric view file in the working directory.

To prevent HP StorageWorks Fabric View from prompting you to save the default fabric view file between sessions, set the Auto Load and Save Graphing Environment setting to Enable

(default). See “ Setting HP StorageWorks Fabric View preferences” on page 93 for more

information.

Figure 35: Save Default Fabric View File dialog box – HP StorageWorks Fabric View

In your next HP StorageWorks Fabric View session, the Load Default Fabric File dialog box

(

Figure 3 ) prompts you to load the default fabric view file and to specify its encryption key, if

there is one. In the Default Fabric File Encryption Key box, enter the encryption key and then click Load View File. If you do not want to load the default fabric view file, click

Continue Without Loading to open the HP StorageWorks Fabric View with no fabric displayed.

Figure 36: Load Default Fabric File dialog box – HP StorageWorks Fabric View

Saving and opening Fabric View files

In addition to the HP StorageWorks Fabric View default fabric view file, you can save and open your own fabric view files. The fabric view file contains the set of fabrics, graphs, and graphing options.



92


Switch Manager

Files are saved in the working directory.

3. Enter a password.

When you attempt to open this fabric file, you are prompted for this password. If you leave the File Password box blank, no password is required.

To open a fabric view file:

1. Select File > Open View File. The Open View dialog box is displayed.


Changing the Default Fabric View File encryption key

1. Select File > Save Default File Fabric View File. The Save Default File Fabric View File dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter the new password in the Default File Encryption Key box.

3. Re-enter the same password in the Re-enter Encryption Key to Confirm box.

4. Click OK to save the changes.

Setting HP StorageWorks Fabric View preferences

To set preferences, select File > Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed

(

Figure 37

). Set the following preferences and then click OK to save the changes:

■

■

Change the location of the working directory in which to save files.

Change the location of the browser used to view the online help.

■

Enable or disable the Auto Load and Auto Save Graphing Options preference. When enabled, HP StorageWorks Fabric View prompts you to save and load the default fabric

file between sessions. See “ Exiting HP StorageWorks Fabric View ” on page 92 for more

information on the default fabric view file.

Figure 37: Preferences – HP StorageWorks Fabric View

Setting the polling frequency

Fabric View updates the graphs once per second by default. To change this polling frequency:

1. Select Graph > Set Polling Frequency. The Set Graph Polling Frequency dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter the new polling interval in seconds [1–60].

Fabric View updates the graphs once during the interval. For example, setting the polling frequency to 5 seconds returns 1 second’s worth of data every 5 seconds.

3. Click OK.


93

Switch Manager

Displaying graphs

1. Select Fabric > Add Fabric. The Add a New Fabric dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter a fabric name and an IP address.

3. Enter an account name and a password, if required.

4. Set the graphing options and polling frequency.

By default, HP StorageWorks Fabric View plots total bytes transmitted and received at a

polling frequency of once per second. See “ Customizing graphs ” on page 94 for

information about changing what is plotted and how it is plotted.

5. You can display graphs in the following ways:

— Click on a switch entry handle and select one or more ports.

— Right-click on a switch icon in the fabric tree, and then select Open Graph for All

Ports on Switch or Open Graph for All Logged-In Ports on Switch from the menu.

6. You can move graphs around individually by clicking and dragging, or you can arrange

them as a group. See “ Arranging graphs in the display ” on page 94 for more information.

Removing graphs

1. After viewing the graph, click Remove.

2. To remove all graphs, select Window > Close All.

To remove a fabric and its graphs:

1. Select the fabric in the fabric tree.

2. Select Fabric > Remove Fabric. You can also right-click on a fabric and then select

Remove Fabric for the menu.

Right-clicking on a graph opens a menu from which you can change graph options, print a graph, or save the graph statistics to a file.

Arranging graphs in the display

To arrange and size graphs in the display, select Window > Cascade, Tile, or Close All.

■

Cascade overlaps the graphs so that all graphs are at least partially visible.

■

Tile arranges the graphs in non-overlapping rows and columns.

■

Close All closes all graphs.

You can also click a graph on the Window menu to bring that graph to the front.

Customizing graphs

You can customize the graph polling frequency, what is plotted in the graphs, and the graph

color scheme. To set the polling frequency for all graphs, refer to “ Setting the polling frequency ” on page 93.

1. Select Graph > Modify Graph Options. The Default Graph Options dialog box is displayed (

Figure 38 ).

94


Switch Manager

Figure 38: Default Graph Options dialog box

You can also right-click on a graph, and then select Change Graph Options.

1. Choose the units for the graph:

— Select the Show Bytes Data on Graph check box to plot data in KBytes/second.

— Select the Show Frames Data on Graph check box to plot data in frames/second.

2. Choose what data type to plot. For example, if you selected Show Frames Data on

Graph in step 1 , you can plot one or all of the following:

— Total frames transmitted and received (Total Frames)

— Total frames transmitted (Total Tx Frames)

— Total frames received (Total Rx Frames)

Note: In addition to these, you can also plot total errors by selecting the Total Errors check box.

3. Select Display Grid on Graph to display the unit grid.

4. Choose the color scheme for the graph: a.

Click Select Color to open its corresponding Select Color dialog box.

b.

Select the color for each data type, the unit grid, and the background by clicking the corresponding color box or button.

In each case, you can choose a color using the Swatches, Red-Green-Blue (RGB), or

Hue-Saturation-Brightness (HSB) method.


95

Switch Manager

Note: Clicking Reset in the Swatches, HSB, and RGB tab pages of the Select Color dialog box resets the colors in the Preview area to the last saved color scheme. At this point you are only selecting a new color scheme to be saved.

— Swatches – Click the Swatches tab. Select a swatch from the palette.

— HSB – Click the HSB tab. Select a color using any of the following methods:

— Click in the color palette.

— Select H, S, or B and use the slide to vary the selected value.

— Enter values in the H, S, or B input boxes.

— RGB – Click the RGB tab. Select a color by moving the slides to adjust the values for red, blue, and green; or enter values in the input boxes.

c.

Click OK.

5. Click the corresponding option to apply changes to all graphs, the currently selected graph, or all new graphs.

6. Click OK.

Printing graphs

1. Select a graph.

2. Select File > Print Graph Window.

You can also right-click on a graph and then select Print Graph Window from the menu.

Rescaling a selected graph

The Rescale Selected Graph option auto-scales downward and re-positions the data within a graphic window to display all new data captured by the graph.

1. Select a graph.

2. Select Graph > Rescale Selected Graph or right-click on the graph, and then select

Rescale from the menu.

3. View the data in the graph window.

Saving graph statistics to a file

Statistics for graphs can be saved to a file that can be opened with a spreadsheet application.

1. Select a graph.

2. Select File > Save Current Graph Statistics to a File or Save All Graph Statistics to a

File. The Save dialog box is displayed.

You can also right-click on a graph and select Save Statistics to File.

3. Enter a path name for the file.

By default, the file is saved in the working directory.

4. Click Save.

96


Switch Manager

Interpreting Switch Manager messages

This section lists the Switch Manager messages by task, dialog box, or display. To find a message and what to do about it, consider what task you are performing, and refer to the corresponding subsection.

■

■

Fabrics File—Open, Save messages , page 97

Add a Fabric messages , page 97

■

■

■

■

Network Properties dialog box messages , page 98

Switch Properties dialog box messages , page 99

Port Properties dialog box messages , page 101

Faceplate display messages , page 102

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Load Firmware dialog box messages , page 104

Port Loopback Test dialog box messages , page 104

Extended Credits wizard messages , page 106

Zoning dialog box messages , page 106

Restore Configuration dialog box messages , page 108

Save Fabric View dialog box messages , page 108

Trap Configuration dialog box messages , page 109

Fabrics File—Open, Save messages

Table 28: Fabrics file—Open, Save messages

Message

Failed opening fabrics list file filename

.

Failed saving fabrics list file filename

.

User action

Verify that the specified file exists on a file system that is reachable, and that the user has permissions to read the file.

Verify that the specified file system is reachable, and that the user has permissions to write to the file system, to the directory, and to the file.

Add a Fabric messages

Table 29: Add a Fabric messages

Message

Fabric or fabricname

already exists!

Fabric name already in use.

Invalid IP Address

The entry switch is of a type that is not supported.

User action

Specify a name for the fabric that is not already assigned to an existing fabric.

Verify that the IP address specified is syntactically correctly.

The switch hardware or firmware version of the switch at the specified IP address is not supported. Choose the IP address of a different switch, or update the firmware using Telnet or the appropriate version of the application.


97

Switch Manager

Table 29: Add a Fabric messages (Continued)

Message

The maximum number of management sessions on the entry switch has been exceeded.

Unable to login to switch. Reason: …

Unknown host hostname

.

Verify correct user name and password and retry.

User action

The application cannot establish a session with the fabric because too many sessions are already open. Close any other application or

Telnet sessions to the fabric and try again.

Verify that the user name and password entered in the dialog box are valid login information for an account on the switch specified by the IP address box.

Verify that the host name specified for the IP address is a valid hostname for a switch in the fabric, and that the switch is reachable from the user’s workstation.

Either the user name or password is incorrect.

Enter the correct values and retry.

Network Properties dialog box messages

Table 30: Network Properties dialog box messages

Message

Attempt to change snmp community strings failed.

or

Attempt to change syslog configuration failed.

Unable to apply invalid syslog host address.

User action

Verify that the data is valid, that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the configuration change.

Verify that either a syntactically correct IP address was specified for the syslog host, or that a host name was specified for a valid syslog host that is reachable from the user’s workstation.

98


Switch Manager

Switch Properties dialog box messages

Table 31: Switch Properties dialog box messages

Message

Attempt to change chassis name failed.

or

Attempt to set in-band management failed.

or

Attempt to change domain ID lock failed.

or

Attempt to change SNMP configuration failed.

or

Attempt to change IP configuration failed.

or

Attempt to change chassis configuration failed.

or

Attempt to change timeout values failed.

or

Attempt to change broadcast support failed.

Disabling in-band management makes the switch unreachable. Do you wish to continue with this change?

User action


Duplicate domain ID specified.

If you set this in-band switch offline you need an ethernet connection to the switch to put it back online. Do you want to set switch offline?

or

If you set this in-band switch in diagnostics mode you need an ethernet connection to the switch to put it back online. Do you want to set switch in diagnostics mode?

IP configuration changes do not take effect until switch is reset.

If this feature is disabled, this switch is no longer manageable through this session to the fabric.

If this is acceptable, continue; otherwise cancel the operation.

Verify that all information is valid and retry the configuration change. Consult the documentation for valid configurations.

Valid domain IDs must be in the range 1 to

239, and must be unique within a fabric.

These changes prevent the application from communicating with the switch in the fabric.

Before applying the changes, verify that the switch is reachable through its own Ethernet port, and then add a new fabric (Fabric>Add

Fabric) at the switch’s own IP address.

Modification of IP configuration requires a switch reset to take effect. The reset may disrupt traffic. Do you wish to continue?

The new IP configuration has been set on the switch, but the user has decided not to reset the switch at this time. Arrange a time when it is acceptable to disrupt communications between the hosts and storage systems, and then reset the switch to make the changes effective.

This configuration information does not become effective unless the switch is reset.

Resetting a switch in the fabric causes the servers and storage systems attached to the fabric to lose communications until the switch reset is complete and the fabric has re-initialized. If this is acceptable, continue; otherwise cancel the reset operation.


99

Switch Manager

Table 31: Switch Properties dialog box messages (Continued)

Message

Out of range domain ID specified.

Received error in attempting to edit switch configuration.

or

Received error in attempting to save switch configuration.

or

Received error in attempting to activate switch configuration.

Reset will complete shortly. There is a brief loss of connectivity with switch.

The new domain ID specified is invalid.

Unable to apply invalid chassis/fabric ID values

User action



239, and must be unique within a fabric. If the fabric contains Switch with E_Port switches, all domain IDs must be in the same range of sixteen values: 1…16, 17…32, and so on.


Unable to apply changes. Failed to obtain admin privileges.

Unable to apply invalid timeout values.

or

Unable to apply invalid IP address.

or

Unable to apply invalid trap address.

or

Unable to apply invalid subnet mask.

or

Unable to apply invalid gateway address.

or

Unable to apply invalid ARP timeout value.

Wait for the switch to become reachable again. This may take up to one minute.




Verify that another user is not currently modifying the switch configuration, using either the management application, or a telnet login, or any application.




100


Switch Manager

Port Properties dialog box messages

Table 32: Port Properties dialog box messages

Message

Invalid value entered for interop credits.

or

Failed to set I/O stream guard change.

or

Failed to set new interop credits.

or

Request to save and activate config failed.

or

Received error in attempting to edit switch configuration.

or

Received error in attempting to save switch configuration.

or

Received error in attempting to activate switch configuration.

Received error in attempting to release admin privileges.


User action

Verify that the data is valid, that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the configuration change. Interop Credits is not supported at this time.

The application did not receive a required response from the switch. This may be caused by a momentary or extended loss of communications with the fabric.

First refresh the information in the display to determine whether the changes took effect. If not, retry the changes.

If the error persists, determine whether communications with the switch have stopped, and resolve any network problems. When communication with the fabric has resumed, return to the application to view the properties for the port and verify whether the changes took effect. If not, retry the changes.



101

Switch Manager

Table 32: Port Properties dialog box messages (Continued)

Message

Unable to apply changes. Failed to obtain admin privileges.

Unable to confirm that port changes were successful.

Unable to successfully apply port speed change.

or

Unable to successfully apply port state change.

or

Unable to successfully apply port type change.

Verify that another user is not currently modifying the switch configuration, using the operation.

User action either the management application, or a Telnet login, or any other application, and then retry

The application did not receive a required response from the switch. This may be caused by a momentary or extended loss of communications with the fabric.

First refresh the information in the display to determine whether the changes took effect. If not, retry the changes.

If the error persists, determine whether communications with the switch have stopped, and resolve any network problems. When communication with the fabric has resumed, return to the application to view the properties for the port and verify whether the changes took effect. If not, retry the changes.


Faceplate display messages

Table 33: Faceplate display messages

Message

Failed to clear the trap log.

Necessary information is missing for this switch. Firmware version on this switch is unsupported.

Necessary information is missing for this switch. Retry later.

User action

Verify that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the configuration change.

The user has attempted an action which cannot be completed because it requires information from the switch which the switch does not support. Update the firmware on the switch to the latest version.

The user has attempted an action which cannot be completed until specific information has been retrieved from the switch. This condition usually corrects within several seconds.

If the condition doesn’t correct itself, verify that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation. When the switch is reachable again, wait for the application to retrieve complete information from the switch (this may take up to one minute), or refresh the display.

102


Switch Manager

Table 33: Faceplate display messages (Continued) wish to continue?

or

Message

One of the selected ports is currently in use as a donor port to allow for extended credits on another port. Modifications to donor ports are not permitted.

Port reset failed.

or

Request to reset to factory defaults has failed.

or

Request for switch reset failed.

Request for switch reset failed because admin access was not available.

Reset will complete shortly. There is a brief loss of connectivity with switch.

Resetting the switch will disrupt traffic. Do you

Deactivating the active zone set will disrupt traffic. Do you wish to continue?

Resetting to factory defaults will disrupt traffic and cause current switch configuration to be lost.

Showing Last Known State.

User action

Deselect the donor ports, and then retry the operation.


Verify that another user is not currently modifying the switch configuration, using either the management application, or a telnet login, or any application, and then retry the operation.

Wait for the switch to become reachable again. This may take up to one minute.

The requested action causes the servers and storage systems attached to the fabric to lose communications until the switch reset is complete and the fabric has re-initialized. If this is acceptable, continue; otherwise cancel the operation.

This action is disruptive to the fabric. Verify that this is the action that you want to take.

The file currently exists.

The switch state displayed by the application cannot be updated because the switch has become unreachable. Verify that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation.

The selected switch archive file already exists.

If it is acceptable to overwrite the file, continue.

Otherwise, return and select a different archive file.

Select only a single port, and then retry the operation.

The online port loopback test can only be performed on a single port at a time. There are multiple ports selected. Continue with loopback test on first selected port.

The zoning information you are about to edit is incomplete. If you apply changes you will possibly lose zoning information.

Unable to perform request. Switch is currently unreachable.

The application has not been able to completely read the current zoning database from the switch. If the user edits the incomplete database information and applies the changes, any information which has not been read from the switch is lost.

If this is acceptable, continue. Otherwise, verify that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation then refresh the display and verify that the zoning database has been completely read, and then retry the operation.

Verify that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the operation.


103

Switch Manager

Load Firmware dialog box messages

Table 34: Load Firmware dialog box messages

Message

Bad checksum/CRC for the firmware image or incorrect firmware image for this type of switch.

File was not found.

Firmware image had a bad CRC or was invalid for this type of switch.

Firmware upload status unknown. Image has been uploaded, but confirmation from the switch was not received.

The flash memory on the switch may be too small for this image.

Unable to load firmware.

Unable to read file.

User action

Select the correct firmware file for this switch.

Verify that the firmware file specified actually exists, or specify a new firmware file.

Select a valid firmware image for this type of switch and retry the operation.

The application lost communications with the switch while the switch was unpacking the firmware image. If the problem was temporary, examine the firmware versions on the switch to verify that the firmware was unpacked correctly, or upload a new firmware image to the switch.

Select an appropriate firmware image for this type of switch and retry the operation.

An unspecified error has occurred. Verify that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the firmware upload.

Verify that the firmware file specified exists and is readable by the user, on a file system readable by the user, or specify a new firmware file.

Port Loopback Test dialog box messages

Table 35: Port Loopback test dialog box messages

Message

Attempt to put port in diagnostic state has failed. Unable to continue with port test.

External port test requires a loopback device be plugged into the selected port. Click “OK” when loopback device is installed.

Failed to correctly restore port states for one or more ports.

User action


Verify that a loopback device is attached to the port before starting loopback test.

Invalid frame count value.

or

Invalid frame size. Must be 36 to 2148.

or

Invalid hex pattern. Up to 8 hex digits allowed.

Return to the faceplate view and then select

View>Port State to determine which port was not restored to its original state. Select the port, and then select Port>Port Properties to restore the port state.

Verify that all information is valid, and then retry the loopback test.

104


Switch Manager

Table 35: Port Loopback test dialog box messages (Continued)

Message

No device detected in selected port yet. Test will not be run on empty port.

Request to get admin privileges failed.

Request to start loopback test failed.

or

Request to stop loopback test failed.

or

Request for loopback test results failed.

or

Request to reset loopback test results failed.

Switch is currently unreachable. Unable to accurately report status of port test.

User action

Verify that a loopback device is attached to the port before starting loopback test.

Verify that the port is online with an active login before starting the loopback test.



The port selected for online port test must be online with active login.

Timed out on response notifications. Test terminated.

Unable to perform loopback test on port...

■

■

■ because port is not in diagnostic state.

because port is a donor port.

because there is already a port test in progress.

The application lost communications with the switch while the switch was running the loopback tests, and could not determine whether the tests completed. If the problem was temporary, restart the loopback tests.

Verify that the port is online with an active login before starting the loopback test.

The application lost communications with the switch while the switch was running the loopback tests, and could not determine whether the tests completed. If the problem was temporary, restart the loopback tests.

Correct the error indicated, and then retry the loopback test.


105

Switch Manager

Extended Credits wizard messages

Table 36: Extended Credits wizard messages

Message

Request for admin failed.

Request for extended credits failed.

Request to edit config failed.

or


User action


Verify that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the operation.

Verify that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the operation.

Zoning dialog box messages

Table 37: Zoning dialog box messages

Message

Error loading zoning.

Error returned from switch.

Error saving zoning.

Failed to obtain admin privileges.

User action

Verify that the specified zoning configuration file exists on a file system that is reachable, and that the user has permissions to read the file.

Verify that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then refresh the zoning information from the switch to determine whether any of the zoning configuration has been applied.

If necessary, re-edit the zoning configuration and apply to the switch again.

Verify that the specified zoning configuration file exists on a file system that is reachable, and that the user has permissions to write the file.


Select a valid name for the object, and then retry the operation.

Invalid name. Valid names start with a letter and valid chars include: all alphanumeric chars [aA - zZ] [0 - 9] symbols ['$', '_', and '-'

Maximum number of zones created.

No member(s) selected; nothing to add.

Remove unnecessary objects from the zoning configuration, and then retry the operation.

Select the members to add, and then retry the operation.

106


Switch Manager

Table 37: Zoning dialog box messages (Continued)

Message

No response from the switch.

or

Saving zoning data failed.

User action

Verify that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then refresh the zoning information from the switch to determine whether any of the zoning configuration has been applied. If necessary, re-edit the zoning configuration and apply to the switch again.

Remove unnecessary objects from the zoning configuration and retry the operation.

The maximum number of members has been reached.

or

The maximum number of members per zone has been reached

The Orphan set is a place a holder for zones that are not in a set. It can not be deleted.

The zone set you are attempting to activate contains port based zoning and there are switches in the fabric that might not support this type of zoning. Some E_Ports may isolate.

Do you wish to continue?

The zoning configuration has been changed.

Would you like to apply your changes?

There is already a zone by that name in a different Zone set. Would you like to add that zone to this Zone Set?

Do not attempt to delete the orphan zone set.

Not all switch vendors support port-based zoning. Consult the manual for these vendors’ switches to determine whether to apply this zoning configuration to the fabric. This feature is not supported by HP.

The zoning configuration includes changes that have not been applied to the switch. Click

Yes to apply the changes to the switch before continuing, or click No to discard the changes and continue.

If the existing zone is the same as zone that the user wants to add to this zoneset, continue.

Otherwise, select a unique name for the new zone, and then retry the operation.

Select a unique name for the new object, and then retry the operation.

There is already a zone set with that name.

or

There is already a zone with that name.

or

There is already a alias with that name.

This zoning configuration exceeds the limits for this switch.

Remove unnecessary objects from the zoning configuration, and then retry the operation.


107

Switch Manager

Table 37: Zoning dialog box messages (Continued)

Message

Unable to create alias.

You are about to save a zoning configuration that was not completely read in. Saving this version will make the incomplete database permanent.

You have zones in the orphan zone set. These are not saved in the switch. Would you like to continue?

User action

The zoning configuration already contains the maximum allowed zoning aliases. Delete any unwanted aliases, and then retry the operation.

An error was encountered while reading the zoning database from the switch, and so the database edited by the user may be missing some zoning information.

Cancel the save, close the Zoning dialog, refresh the switch, and then retry the operation.

Orphan zones are not applied to the switch. If the orphan zones are to be applied to the switch, they must first be added to a configured zoneset. Orphan set is not saved on 2/8q FC switches, and is used only in the application while configuring zoning information.

Restore Configuration dialog box messages

Table 38: Restore Configuration dialog box messages

Message

Failed parsing filename

.

Possibly failed check switch!

Restore failed!

User action

Verify that the file specified is a valid archive file, and then retry the operation.

The application lost communications with the switch while restoring the archived configuration, and could not determine whether the operation completed. If the problem was temporary, retry the operation.

Verify that the user has permissions to modify the configuration on the switch, that the switch is reachable in the fabric, and that the fabric is reachable from the user’s workstation, and then retry the configuration restore.

Save Fabric View dialog box messages

Table 39: Save Fabric View dialog box messages

Message

File filename

already exists. Do you want to overwrite?

User action

The specified view file already exists. Cancel, or continue to overwrite the file.

108


Switch Manager

Trap Configuration dialog box messages

Table 40: Trap Configuration dialog box messages

Message

Invalid rising threshold.

or

Invalid falling threshold.

or

Invalid sample interval.

You must wait for trap information to be read first.

or

You must wait for alarm threshold information to be read first.

User action

Verify that the information is correct, and then retry.

The application has not completely read in some configuration information which is needed for this operation.

Wait until the information has been completely read and then retry.


109

Switch Manager

110


Command Line Interface

2

The command line interface (CLI) enables you to perform a variety of fabric and switch management tasks through an Ethernet or a serial port connection.

This section describes the following:

■

■

■

■

Logging on to a switch , page 112

Working with user accounts , page 112

Working with switch configurations , page 113

Commands , page 116


111


Logging on to a switch

To log on to a switch using a Telnet session, open a command line window on the workstation and enter the Telnet command followed by the switch IP address:

# telnet ip_address

A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login. Enter an account name and password.

To log on to a switch through the serial port, configure the workstation port with the following settings and enter an account name and password when prompted.

Table 41: Workstation port settings

Baud rate

Data bits

Parity

Stop bits

Parameter Setting

9600 bits per second

8

None

1

Working with user accounts

Switches come from the factory with the following user account already defined:

Table 42: Predefined user accounts

Account name admin password

Password admin

Authority

This user account provides full access to the switch and its configuration. After planning your fabric management needs and creating your own user accounts, consider changing the

password for this account. See “ Commands ” on page 116 for more information about

authority levels. See the “ User command ” on page 171 for information about creating user

accounts.

Note: A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins or sessions reserved as follows:

■

4 logins or sessions for internal applications such as management server and SNMP.

■

■

9 high priority Telnet sessions.

6 logins or sessions for Switch Manager inband and out-of-band logins, and Telnet logins.

Additional logins are refused.

112



Working with switch configurations

Successful management of switches and fabrics with the command line interface depends on the effective use of switch configurations. Key switch management tasks include:

■

■

■

Modifying a configuration

Backing up a switch configuration


Modifying a configuration

A switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration. Each switch configuration contains switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning components.

The

Show Switch

command displays the name of the active configuration. A configuration name can have up to 31 characters excluding the pound symbol (#), semicolon

(;), and comma (,). By editing the latest configuration and saving the results under a new name, you can create a history of configuration changes. Use the

Config List

command to display the names of the configurations stored on the switch:

2/8q FC Switch #> config list

Current list of configurations

------------------------------

default

config_10132003

To modify a switch configuration you must open an Admin session with the

Admin Start command. An Admin session prevents other accounts from making changes at the same time either through Telnet or Switch Manager. You must also open a Config Edit session with the

Config Edit

command and indicate which configuration you want to modify. If you do not specify a configuration name, the active configuration is assumed. The Config Edit session provides access to the Set Config commands with which you make modifications to the port, switch, port threshold alarm, or zoning configuration components as shown:

2/8q FC Switch #> admin start

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> config edit default

The config named default is being edited.

2/8q FC Switch (admin-config)#> set config port . . .

2/8q FC Switch (admin-config)#> set config switch . . .

2/8q FC Switch (admin-config)#> set config threshold . . .

2/8q FC Switch (admin-config)#> set config zoning . . .

The

Config Save command saves the changes you made during the Config Edit session.

In this case, changes to the configuration named

Default

are being saved to a new configuration named config_10132003

. However, the new configuration does not take effect until you activate it with the

Config Activate

command as shown:

2/8q FC Switch (admin-config)#> config save config_10132003

2/8q FC Switch (admin)#> config activate config_10132003

2/8q FC Switch (admin)#> admin end

2/8q FC Switch #>

The

Admin End

command releases the Admin session for other administrators when you are done making changes to the switch.


113


Backing up a switch configuration

Backing up and restoring a configuration is useful to protect your work or for use as a template in configuring other switches. The

Config Backup

command creates a file on the switch, named configdata

. This file can be used to restore a switch configuration only from the command line interface; it cannot be used to restore a switch using Switch Manager.


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> config backup

The configdata

file contains all of the switch configuration information including the following:

■

■

All named switch configurations including the default configuration. This includes port, switch, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration components.

All SNMP and network information defined with the

Set Setup

command.

■

The zoning database included all zone sets, zones, and aliases.

Use FTP to download the configdata

file to your workstation for safe keeping and to upload the file back to the switch for the restore function. To download the configdata

file, open an FTP session on the switch and login with the account name images

and password images

. Transfer the file in binary mode using the

Get

command as shown:

>ftp ip_address user:images password: images ftp>bin ftp>get configdata

xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs.

ftp>quit

You should rename the configdata

file on your workstation with the switch name and date, config_switch_169_10112003

, for example.

114




The restore operation begins with FTP to upload the configuration file from the workstation to the switch, and then finishes with a Telnet session and the

Config Restore

command. To upload the configuration file, config_switch_169_10112003

in this case, open and

FTP session with account name images

and password images

. Transfer the file in binary mode using the

Put

command as shown: ftp ip_address user:images password: images ftp> bin ftp> put config_switch_169_10112003 configdata

Local file config_switch_169_10112003

Remote file configdata ftp>quit

The restore process replaces all configuration information on the switch and afterwards the switch is automatically reset. If the restore process changes the IP address, all management sessions are terminated. Use the

Set Setup System

command to return the IP

configuration to the values you want. See the “ Set Setup command ” on page 147. To restore

the switch, open a Telnet session, and then enter the

Config Restore

command from within an Admin session as shown:


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> config restore

The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration.

Please confirm (y/n): [n] y


115


Commands

The command is followed by one or more keywords. Consider the following rules and conventions:

■

■

Commands and keywords are case insensitive.

Required keyword values appear in standard font: [value]. Optional values are shown in italics: [value].

■

Underlined portions of the keyword in the command format indicate the abbreviated form that can be used. For example the Delete keyword can be abbreviated Del.

The command-line completion feature makes entering and repeating commands easier.

Table 43 describes the command-line completion keystrokes.

Table 43: Command line completion

Keystroke

Tab

Up Arrow

Down Arrow

Ctrl-A

Ctrl-E

Effect

Completes the command line. Enter at least one character and press Tab to complete the command line. If more than one possibility exists, press Tab again to display all possibilities.

Scrolls backward through the list of previously entered commands.

Scrolls forward through the list of previously entered commands.

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line.

Moves the cursor to the end of the command line.

The command set performs monitoring and configuration tasks. Commands related to monitoring tasks are available to all account names. Commands related to configuration tasks are available only within an admin session. An account must have Admin authority to enter the

Admin Start

command, which opens an admin session. See the “ Admin command ” on page 117.

The commands and their page numbers are listed in

Table 44 .

Table 44: Commands listed by Authority Level

Monitoring commands

Help

command page 125

History

command

Ping

command

Ps

command

page 126

page 130 page 130

Quit

command

Show

command

page 131

page 150

Administrative commands

Admin

command page 117

Alias

command

Config

command

page 118

page 119

page 122

Create Support command

Date

command

Firmware Install command

Hardreset

command

page 123 page 123

page 124

Show Config command

Show Log

command

Show Perf

command

page 160

page 163

page 165

Show Setup

command page 166

Uptime

command page 171

Hotreset

command

Image

command

Lip

command

Passwd

command

page 126

page 127

page 129 page 129

116



Table 44: Commands listed by Authority Level (Continued)

Monitoring commands

Whoami

command page 173

Reset

Administrative commands

command

Set

command

Set Config

command

Set Log

Command

Set Port command

Set Setup

command

Shutdown

command

Test

command

User

command

Zone

Command

Zoneset

command

page 131

page 135

page 137

page 144

page 146

page 147

page 169 page 169

page 171

page 174

page 176

Admin

command

Opens and closes an Admin session. The Admin session provides commands that change the fabric and switch configurations. Only one Admin session can be open on the switch at any time. An inactive Admin session times out after a period of time which can be changed using the

Set Setup System

command. See the “ Set Setup command ” on page 147.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

ADMIN

Keywords

START

Opens the admin session.

END

Closes the admin session. The

Hardreset

,

Logout

,

Shutdown

, and

Reset

Switch

commands also end an admin session.

CANCEL

Terminates an Admin session opened by another user. Use this keyword with care because it terminates the Admin session without warning the other user and without saving pending changes.

Notes

Closing a Telnet window during an admin session does not release the session. In this case, you must either wait for the admin session to time out, or use the

Admin Cancel command.


117


Examples

The following example shows how to open and close an Admin session:


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #>

.

.

.

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> admin end

2/8q FC Switch #>

Alias

command

Creates a named set of ports/devices. Aliases make it easier to assign a set of ports/devices to many zones. An alias can not have a zone or another alias as a member.

Authority

Admin session for all keywords except

List

and

Members

.

Syntax

ALIAS

Keywords

ADD [ALIAS] [ MEMBER_LIST]

Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [member_list] to add to the alias named

[alias]. Use a <space> to delimit ports/devices in [member_list]. An alias can have a maximum of 2000 members. The application verifies that the [alias] format is correct, but does not validate that such a port/device exists. A port/device in [member_list] can have any of the following formats:

— Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs can be

1–-239; port numbers can be 0–-255.

— 6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)

— 16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

COPY [ALIAS_SOURCE] [ALIAS_DESTINATION]

Creates a new alias named [alias_destination] and copies the membership into it from the alias given by [alias_source].

CREATE [ALIAS]

Creates an alias with the name given by [alias]. An alias name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -.

The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 aliases.

118



DELETE [ALIAS]

Deletes the specified alias given by [alias] from the zoning database. If the alias is a member of the active zone set, the alias will not be removed from the active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.

LIST

Displays a list of all aliases. This keyword does not require an admin session.

MEMBERS [ALIAS]

Displays all members of the alias given by [alias]. This keyword does not require an admin session.

REMOVE [ALIAS] [MEMBER_LIST]

Removes the ports/devices given by [member_list] from the alias given by [alias]. Use a <space> to delimit ports/devices in [member_list]. A port/device in [member_list] can have any of the following formats:


1–-239; port numbers can be 0–-255.


— 16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) for the device with the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.

RENAME [ALIAS_OLD] [ALIAS_NEW]

Renames the alias given by [alias_old] to the alias given by [alias_new].

Config

command

Manages the Fibre Channel configurations on a switch. For information about setting the port

and switch configurations, refer to the “ Set Config command ” on page 137.

Authority

Admin session for all keywords except

Backup

and

List

.

Syntax config

Keywords

ACTIVATE [config_name]

Activates the configuration given by [config_name]. If you omit [config_name], the currently active configuration is used. Only one configuration can be active at a time.

BACKUP

Creates a file named configdata

, which contains the system configuration information. To download this file, open an FTP session, log in with account name/password of images

for both, and type get configdata

. See “ Backing up a switch configuration ” on page 114. This keyword does not require an Admin

session.

CANCEL

Terminates the current configuration edit session without saving changes that were made.


119


COPY [config_source] [config_destination]

Copies the configuration given by [config_source] to the configuration given by

[config_destination]. The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration.

DELETE [config_name]

Deletes the configuration given by [config_name] from the switch.

EDIT [config_name]

Opens an edit session for the configuration given by [config_name]. If you omit

[config_name], the currently active configuration is used.

LIST

Displays a list of all available configurations on the switch. This keyword does not require an admin session.

RESTORE

Restores configuration settings to an out-of-band switch from a backup file named configdata

, which must be first uploaded on the switch using FTP. You create the backup file using the

Config Backup

command. Use FTP to load the backup file on a switch, and then enter the

Config Restore

command. After the restore is

complete, the switch automatically resets. See “ Backing up a switch configuration ” on page 114.

Note:

■

■

If the restore process changes the IP address, all management sessions are terminated. Use the

Set Setup System

command to return the IP configuration to the values you want. See the

“ Set Setup command ” on page 147.

Configuration archive files created with the Switch Manager Archive function are not compatible with the

Config Restore

command.

SAVE [config_name]

Saves changes made during a configuration edit session in the configuration given by

[config_name]. If you omit [config_name], the value for [config_name] you chose for the most recent

Config Edit

command is used. [config_name] can be up to 31 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the default configuration.

Notes

If you edit the active configuration, changes are held in suspense until you reactivate the configuration or activate another configuration.

Examples

The following shows an example of how to open and close a Config Edit session:


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> config edit

The config named default is being edited.

.

.

120



2/8q FC Switch (admin-config) #> config cancel

Configuration mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y


The following is an example of how to create a backup file ( configdata

) and download the file to the workstation:


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> config backup


2/8q FC Switch #> exit

#>ftp symbolic_name or ip_address user: images password: images ftp> bin ftp> get configdata ftp> quit

The following is an example of how to upload a configuration backup file ( configdata

) from the workstation to the switch, and then restore the configuration:

#> ftp symbolic_name or ip_address user: images password: images ftp> bin ftp> put configdata ftp> quit


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> config restore

The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration.


Alarm Msg: [Tue Jun 10 09:25:56.938 2003][A1005.0021][SM][Configuration is being restored - this could take several minutes !]

Alarm Msg: [Tue Jun 10 09:26:19.266 2003][A1000.000A][SM][The switch will be reset in 3 seconds due to a config restore]

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #>

Alarm Msg: [Tue Jun 10 09:26:22.296 2003][A1000.0005][SM][The switch is being reset]

Good bye.


121



Assembles all log files and switch memory data into a core dump file ( dump_support.tgz zip

) and prompts you to send it to a remote host. This file is useful to technical support personnel for troubleshooting switch problems. Use this command when directed by your HP

Authorized Service Provider. The command prompts for the IP address of the remote host, an account name and password on the remote host, and a pathname for an existing folder on the remote host.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

CREATE SUPPORT

Examples

2/8q FC Switch # (admin) #> create support

Log Msg: [day month date time UTC 2004][C][8400.003B][Switch][Creating the support file - this will take several seconds]

FTP the dump support file to another machine? (y/n): y

Enter IP Address of remote computer: 10.20.33.130

Login name: johndoe

Enter remote directory name: bin/support

Would you like to continue downloading support file? (y/n) [n]: y

Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).

220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.

331 Password required for johndoe.

Password: xxxxxxx

230 User johndoe logged in.

cd bin/support

250 CWD command successful.

lcd /itasca/conf/images

Local directory now /itasca/conf/images bin

200 Type set to I.

put dump_support.tgz

local: dump_support.tgz remote: dump_support.tgz

227 Entering Passive Mode (10,20,33,130,232,133)

150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for dump_support.tgz.

226 Transfer complete.

43430 bytes sent in 0.292 secs (1.5e+02 Kbytes/sec)

122



Remote system type is UNIX.

Using binary mode to transfer files.

221-You have transferred 43430 bytes in 1 files.

221-Total traffic for this session was 43888 bytes in 1 transfers.

221 Thank you for using the FTP service on localhost.localdomain.

FTP the dump support file to another machine? (y/n): n

Date

command

This command displays or sets the system date and time. To set the date and time the information string must be provided in this format:

MMDDhhmmCCYY

. The new date and time takes effect immediately.

Authority

Admin session, except to display the date.

Syntax

DATE

Keywords

[MMDDhhmmCCYY]

Specifies the date—this requires an admin session. If you omit

[MMDDhhmmCCYY]

, the current date is displayed, which does not require an admin session.

Examples

2/8q FC Switch #> date

Mon Apr 07 07:51:24 2003

Firmware Install

command

Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch, installs the firmware, and then resets the switch (without a power-on self test) to activate the firmware. If possible, a non-disruptive firmware activation is performed. The command prompts you for the IP address of the remote host, an account name and password on the remote host, and a pathname for the firmware image file.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

FIRMWARE INSTALL


123


Examples

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> firmware install

Warning: Installing new firmware requires a switch reset.

Continuing with this action will terminate all management sessions,

including any Telnet sessions. When the firmware activation is complete,

you may log in to the switch again.

Do you want to continue? [y/n]: y

Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.

User Account : johndoe

IP Address : 10.20.33.130

Source Filename : 4.0.3.04.00_mpc

About to install image. Do you want to continue? [y/n] y

Connected to 10.20.33.130 (10.20.33.130).

220 localhost.localdomain FTP server (Version wu-2.6.1-18) ready.

331 Password required for johndoe.

Password: xxxxxxxxx

230 User johndoe logged in.

bin

200 Type set to I.

verbose

Verbose mode off.

This may take several seconds...

The switch will now reset.

Connection closed by foreign host.

Hardreset

command

Resets the switch and performs a power-on self test. This reset disrupts traffic, activates the pending firmware, and clears the alarm log. To save the alarm log before resetting, refer to the

“ Set Log Command ” on page 144.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

HARDRESET

Notes

To reset the switch without a power-on self test, refer to the “ Reset command ” on page 131.

124



Help

command

Displays a brief description of the specified command, its keywords, and usage.

Authority

None

Syntax

HELP [COMMAND] [KEYWORD]

Keywords

[COMMAND]

Displays a summary of the command given by [command] and its keywords. If you omit [command], the system displays all available commands.

[KEYWORD]

Displays a summary of the keyword given by [keyword] belonging to the command given by [command]. If you omit [keyword], the system displays the available keywords for the specified command.

ALL

Displays a list of all available commands (including command variations).

Examples

2/8q FC Switch #> help config config CONFIG_OPTIONS

The config command operates on configurations.

Usage: config { activate | backup | cancel | copy | delete |

edit | list | restore | save }

The following is an example of the Help Config Edit command:

2/8q FC Switch #> help config edit config edit [CONFIG_NAME]

This command initiates a configuration session and places the current session into config edit mode.

If CONFIG_NAME is given and it exists, it gets edited; otherwise, it gets created. If it is not given, the currently active configuration is edited.

Admin mode is required for this command.

Usage: config edit [CONFIG_NAME]


125


History

command

Displays a numbered list of the previously entered commands from which you can re-execute selected commands.

Authority

None

Syntax

HISTORY

Notes

Use the

History

command to provide context for the ! command:

■

Enter ![command] to re-enter the most recent execution of that command.

■

■

■

Enter ![line number] to re-execute the corresponding command from the History display.

Enter ![partial command string] to re-execute a command that matches the command string.

Enter !! to re-execute the most recent command.

Examples

2/8q FC Switch #> history

1 show switch

2 date

3 help set

4 history

2/8q FC Switch #> !3

help set set SET_OPTIONS

There are many attributes that can be set.

Type help with one of the following to get more information:

Usage: set { alarm | beacon | config | log | pagebreak |

port | setup | switch }

Hotreset

command

Resets the switch for the purpose of activating the pending firmware without disrupting traffic.

This command terminates all management sessions, saves all configuration information, and clears the alarm log. After the pending firmware is activated, the configuration is recovered.

This process takes less than 80 seconds. To save the alarm log to a file before resetting, refer to

the “ Set Log Command ” on page 144.

Authority

Admin

126



Syntax hotreset

Notes

You can load and activate firmware on an operating switch without disrupting data traffic or having to re-initialize attached devices under the following conditions:

■

■

■

■

No changes are being made to switches in the fabric including powering up, powering down, and switch configuration changes.

No port in the fabric is in the diagnostic state.

No zoning changes are being made in the fabric.

No changes are being made to attached devices including powering up, powering down, disconnecting, connecting, and HBA configuration changes.

Ports that are stable when the non-disruptive activation begins and then change states, are reset. When the non-disruptive activation is complete, Switch Manager sessions reconnect automatically. However, Telnet sessions must be restarted manually. This command clears the event log and all counters.

Image

command

Manages and installs switch firmware.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

IMAGE

Keywords

CLEANUP

Removes all firmware image files from the switch. All firmware image files are removed automatically each time the switch is reset.

FETCH [ACCOUNT_NAME] [IP_ADDRESS] [FILE_SOURCE] [FILE_DESTINATION]

Retrieves image file given by [file_source] and stores it on the switch with the file name given by [file_destination]. The image file is retrieved from the FTP server with the IP address given by [ip_address] and an account name given by [account_name]. If an account name needs a password to access the FTP server, the system prompts you for it.

INSTALL

Downloads firmware from a remote host to the switch, unpacks the firmware, and then activates the firmware. The command prompts you for IP address of the remote host, an account name and password, and path name for the firmware image file.

LIST

Displays the list of image files that reside on the switch.

UNPACK [FILE]

Installs the firmware file given by [file]. After unpacking the file, a message is displayed confirming successful unpacking. The switch must be reset for the new firmware to take effect.


127


Notes

To install firmware when the management workstation has an FTP server, use the

Image

Install

command or the “ Firmware Install command ” on page 123. To install firmware

when the management workstation does not have an FTP server:

1. Connect to the switch through the Ethernet or the serial port.

2. Move to the folder or directory on the workstation that contains the new firmware image file.

3. Establish communications with the switch using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP). Enter one of the following on the command line:

>ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx or

>ftp switchname where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

is the switch IP address, and switchname

is the switch name associated with the IP address.

4. Enter the following account name and password: user:images password: images

5. Activate binary mode and copy the firmware image file on the switch: ftp>bin ftp>put filename

6. Wait for the transfer to complete, and then close the FTP session.

xxxxx bytes sent in xx secs.

ftp>quit

7. Establish communications with the switch using the CLI. Enter one of the following on the command line: telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx or telnet switchname where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the switch IP address, and switchname is the switch name associated with the IP address.

8. A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login. Enter an account name and password.

The default account name and password are (admin, password).

9. Open an Admin session to acquire the necessary authority.

2/8q FC Switch $>admin start

10. Display the list of firmware image files on the switch to confirm that the file was loaded.

2/8q FC Switch (admin) $>image list

11. Unpack the firmware image file to install the new firmware in flash memory.

2/8q FC Switch (admin) $>image unpack filename

12. Wait for the unpack to complete.

image unpack command result: Passed

128



13. A message prompts you to reset the switch to activate the firmware.

Enter the hotreset

command to perform a non-disruptive firmware activation.

2/8q FC Switch (admin) $>hotreset

Lip

command

Reinitializes the specified loop port.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

LIP [PORT_NUMBER]

Keywords

[PORT_NUMBER]

The number of the port to be reinitialized.

Examples

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> lip 2

Passwd

command

Changes a user account’s password.

Authority

Admin account name and an admin session to change another account’s password; you can change you own password without an Admin session.

Syntax

PASSWD [ACCOUNT_NAME]

Keywords

[ACCOUNT_NAME]

The user account name. To change the password for an account name other than your own, you must open an admin session with the account name Admin. If you omit

[account_name], you are prompted to change the password for the current account name.

Examples

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> passwd user2


account OLD password : ********

account NEW password (4-20 chars) : ********

please confirm account NEW password: ********

password has been changed.


129


Ping

command

Initiates an attempt to communicate with another switch over an Ethernet network and reports the result.

Authority

None

Syntax

PING

Keywords

IP_ADDRESS

The IP address of the switch to query.

Examples

The following is an example of a successful

Ping

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> ping 10.20.11.57

Ping command issued. Waiting for response...

2/8q FC Switch #>

Response successfully received from 10.20.11.57.

This following is an example of an unsuccessful

Ping

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> ping 10.20.10.100

Ping command issued. Waiting for response...

No response from 10.20.10.100. Unreachable.

Ps

command

Displays current system process information.

Authority

None

Syntax

PS

Examples

2/8q FC Switch #> ps

PID PPID %CPU TIME ELAPSED COMMAND

338 327 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:35 cns

339 327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:35 ens

340 327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:35 dlog

341 327 0.1 00:05:35 3-01:18:35 ds

342 327 0.2 00:11:29 3-01:18:35 mgmtApp

343 327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:35 fc2

344 327 0.0 00:02:16 3-01:18:35 nserver

345 327 0.0 00:02:44 3-01:18:35 mserver

130



346 327 0.8 00:35:12 3-01:18:35 util

347 327 0.0 00:00:29 3-01:18:35 snmpservicepath

348 327 0.0 00:02:46 3-01:18:34 eport

349 327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:34 PortApp

350 327 5.6 04:08:24 3-01:18:34 port_mon

351 327 0.0 00:01:38 3-01:18:34 zoning

352 327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:34 diagApp

404 327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:27 snmpd

405 327 0.0 00:00:02 3-01:18:27 snmpmain

406 405 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:26 snmpmain

Quit

command

Closes the Telnet session.

Authority

None

Syntax

QUIT or

EXIT or

LOGOUT

Notes

You can also press Ctrl+D to close the Telnet session.

Reset

command

Resets the switch configuration parameters. If you omit the keyword, the default is the

Reset

Switch

command.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

RESET


131


Keywords

CONFIG [CONFIG_NAME]

Resets the configuration given by [config_name] to the factory default values for switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration. If [config_name] does not exist on the switch, a configuration with that name is created. If you omit

[config_name], the active configuration is reset. You must activate the configuration for the changes to take effect. See

Table 45

through

Table 47

for switch, port, and port threshold alarm configuration default values.

FACTORY

Resets switch configuration, port configuration, port threshold alarm configuration, zoning configuration, SNMP configuration, system configuration, and zoning to the factory default values. The switch configuration is activated automatically. See

Table 45 through

Table 50

.

Note: Because this keyword changes network parameters, the workstation could lose communication with the switch and release the Admin session.

PORT [PORT_NUMBER]

Reinitializes the port given by [port_number]. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.

SNMP

Resets the SNMP configuration settings to the factory default values. See Table 49

for

SNMP configuration default values.

SWITCH

Resets the switch without a power-on self test. This is the default. This reset disrupts traffic and does the following:

— Activates the pending firmware.

— Closes all management sessions.

— Clears the alarm log. To save the alarm log before resetting, refer to the “ Set Log

Command ” on page 144.

To reset the switch with a power-on self test, refer to the “ Hardreset command ” on page 124.

SYSTEM

Resets the system configuration settings to the factory default values. See Table 50

for system configuration default values.

Note: Because this keyword changes network parameters, the workstation could lose communication with the switch.

ZONING

Clears the zoning database and deactivates the active zone set. The zoning configuration values (autosave, default visibility) remain unchanged.

132



Notes

The following tables specify the various factory default settings:

Table 45: Switch configuration default settings

Parameter

Admin State

Broadcast Enabled

Inband Enabled

Domain ID

Domain ID Lock

Symbolic Name

R_A_TOV

E_D_TOV

Principal Priority

Configuration Description

Default setting

Online

True

True

1 (0x Hex)

False

2/8q FC Switch

10000

2000

254

HP StorageWorks 2/8q FC Switch

Table 46: Port configuration default settings

Parameter

Admin State

Link Speed

Port Type

Symbolic Name

ALFairness

DeviceScanEnabled

ForceOfflineRSCN

ARB_FF

InteropCredit

ExtCredit

FANEnable

LCFEnable

MFSEnable

MSEnable

NoClose

IOStreamGuard

VIEnable

PDISCPingEnable

False

True

False

False

0

0

True

False

Default setting

Online

Auto

GL

Port n, where n is the port number

True

True

False

Disabled

False

True


133


Table 47: Port threshold alarm configuration default settings

Parameter

ThresholdMonitoringEnabled

CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled

RisingTrigger

FallingTrigger

SampleWindow

DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled

RisingTrigger

FallingTrigger

SampleWindow

LoginMonitoringEnabled

RisingTrigger

FallingTrigger

SampleWindow

LogoutMonitoringEnabled

RisingTrigger

FallingTrigger

SampleWindow

LOSMonitoringEnabled

RisingTrigger

FallingTrigger

SampleWindow

True

200

0

10

True

5

1

10

False

True

25

1

10

True

5

1

10

True

100

5

10

Default setting

Table 48: Zoning configuration default settings

Parameter

InteropAutoSave

Default Visibility

Default setting

True (not supported)

All

Table 49: SNMP configuration default settings

Parameter

SNMPEnabled

Contact

Location

Description

Trap [1-5] Address

Trap [1-5] Port

Trap [1-5] Severity

Trap [1-5] Version

Trap [1-5] Enabled

Default setting

True

<syscontact undefined>

<sysLocation undefined>

HP StorageWorks 2/8q FC Switch

Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2–5: 0.0.0.0

162

Warning

2

False

134



Table 49: SNMP configuration default settings (Continued)

Parameter

Object ID

AuthFailureTrap

ProxyEnabled

1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.31

False

True

Default setting

Table 50: System configuration default settings

Parameter

Ethernet Network Discovery

Ethernet Network IP Address

Ethernet Network IP Mask

Ethernet Gateway Address

Admin Timeout

LocalLogEnabled

RemotelogEnabled

RemoteLogHostAddress

NTPClientEnabled

NTPServerAddress

Static

10.0.0.1

255.0.0.0

10.0.0.254

30 minutes

True

False

10.0.0.254

False

10.0.0.254

Default setting

Set

command

Sets a variety of switch parameters.

Authority

Admin for all keywords except

Alarm

,

Beacon

, and

Pagebreak

.

Syntax

SET

Keywords

ALARM [option]

Controls the display of alarms in the session output stream or clears the alarm log.

[option] can be one of the following:

CLEAR

—Clears the alarm log history. This value requires an Admin session.

ON

—Enables the display of alarms in the session output stream.

OFF

—Disables the display of alarms in the session output stream.

BEACON [state]

Enables or disables the flashing of the Logged-In LEDs according to [state]. This keyword does not require an admin session. [state] can be one of the following:

ON

—Enables the flashing beacon.

OFF

—Disables the flashing beacon.


135


CONFIG [option]

Sets switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration parameters. See the

“ Set Config command ” on page 137.

LOG [option]

Specifies the type of entries to be entered in the event log. See the “ Set Log

Command ” on page 144.

PAGEBREAK [state]

Specifies how much information is displayed on the screen at a time according to the value given by [state]. This keyword does not require an admin session. [state] can be one of the following:

ON

—Limits the display of information to 20 lines at a time. The page break functions affects the following commands:

Alias (List, Members), Show (Alarm,

Log), Zone (List, Members), Zoneset (List, Zones), Zoning

(Active, List)

.

OFF

—Allows continuous display of information without a break.

PORT [option]

Sets port state and speed for the specified port. The previous Set Config Port settings are restored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a switch configuration. See the

“ Set Port command ” on page 146.

SETUP [option]

Changes SNMP and system configuration settings. See the “ Set Setup command ” on page 147.

SWITCH [state]

Changes the administrative state for all ports on the switch to the state given by [state].

The previous Set Config Switch settings are restored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a switch configuration. [state] can be one of the following:

ONLINE

—Places all ports online

OFFLINE

—Places all ports offline.

DIAGNOSTICS

—Prepares all ports for testing.

Examples

2/8q FC Switch #> set beacon on

2/8q FC Switch $> set beacon off

136



Set Config

command

Sets switch, port, port threshold alarm, and zoning configuration parameters. The changes you make with this command are not retained when you reset or power cycle the switch unless you save them using the

Config Save

command. See the “ Config command ” on page 119.

Authority

Admin and Config Edit

Syntax

SET CONFIG

Keywords

PORT [port_number]

Initiates an edit session in which to change configuration parameters for the port number given by [port_number]. If you omit [port_number], the system begins with port 0 and proceeds in order through the last port. For each parameter, enter a new value or press Enter to accept the current value shown in brackets. Enter q

to end the configuration for one port, or qq

to end the configuration for all ports. Table 51

describes the port parameters.

PORTS [port_number]

Initiates an editing session in which to change configuration parameters for all ports based on the configuration for the port given by [port_number]. If you omit

[port_number], port 0 is used. For each parameter, enter a new value or press Enter to accept the current value shown in brackets. Enter q

to end the configuration.

Table 51

describes the port parameters.


137


Table 51: Set Config port parameters

Parameter

AdminState

LinkSpeed

PortType

SymbolicPortName

ALFairness

DeviceScanEnabled

ForceOfflineRSCN

ARB_FF

InteropCredit

ExtCredit

FANEnable

LCFEnable

MFSEnable

MSEnable

Description

Port administrative state:

■

Online – Activates and prepares the port to send data. This is the default.

■

■

■

Offline – Prevents the port from receiving signal and accepting a device login.

Diagnostics – Prepares the port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login.

Down – Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers.

Transmission speed: 2 Gbps or Auto. The default is Auto.

Port type: GL, G, F, FL, Donor. The default is GL.

Descriptive name for the port. The name can be up to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is Port n where n is the port number.

Arbitration loop fairness. Enables (True) or disables (False) the switch’s priority to arbitrate on the loop. The default is False.

Enables (True) or disables (False) the scanning of the connected device for FC-4 descriptor information during login.

The default is True.

Enables (False) or disables (True) the immediate transmission of RSCN messages when communication between a port and a device is interrupted. If enabled, the RSCN message is delayed for 200 ms for locally attached devices and 400 ms for devices connected through other switches. The default is

False. This parameter is ignored if IOStreamGuard is enabled.

Send ARB_FF (True) instead of IDLEs (False) on the loop. The default is False.

Interoperability credit. The number of buffer-to-buffer credits per port. 0 means the default (16) is unchanged. Changing interoperability credits is necessary only for E_Ports that are connected to non-FC-SW-2-compliant switches. (not supported)

Extended credits. The number of port buffer credits that this port can acquire from donor ports. The default is 0.

Fabric address notification. Enables (True) or disables (False) the communication of the FL_Port address, port name, and node name to the logged-in NL_Port. The default is True.

Link control frame preference routing. Enables (True) or disables (False) preferred routing of frames with R_CTL =

1100. The default is False. Enabling LCFEnable will disable

MFSEnable.

Multi-Frame Sequence bundling. Prevents (True) or allows

(False) the interleaving of frames in a sequence. The default is

False. Enabling MFSEnable disables LCFEnable and

VIEnable.

Management server enable. Enables (True) or disables (False) management server on this port. The default is True.

138



Table 51: Set Config port parameters (Continued)

Parameter

NoClose

IOStreamGuard

VIEnable

PDISCPingEnable

Description

Loop circuit closure prevention. Enables (True) or disables

(False) the loop’s ability to remain in the open state indefinitely. True reduces the amount of arbitration on a loop when there is only one device on the loop. The default is

False.

I/O Stream Guard. Enable (Enable) or disables (Disable) the suppression of RSCN messages. I/O Stream Guard should be enabled only for ports connected to initiator devices. The default is Disable.

Enables (True) or disables (False) VI preference routing. The default is False. Enabling VIEnable will disable MFSEnable.

Enables (True) or disables (False) the transmission of ping messages from the switch to all devices on a loop port. The default is True.

SWITCH

Initiates an editing session in which to change switch configuration settings. The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value. For each parameter, enter a new value or press Enter to accept the current value shown in brackets.

Table 52 describes the Set Config Switch parameters.

Table 52: Set config switch parameters

Parameter

AdminState

BroadcastEnabled

DefaultDomainID

DomainIDLock

SymbolicName

R_A_TOV

E_D_TOV

PrincipalPriority

ConfigDescription

InteropMode

LegacyAddressFormat

Description

Switch administrative state: online, offline, or diagnostics. The default is Online.

Broadcast. Enables (True) or disables (False) forwarding of broadcast frames. The default is True.

Default domain ID. The default is 1.

Prevents (True) or allows (False) dynamic reassignment of the domain ID. The default is False.

Descriptive name for the switch. The name can be up to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is 2/8q FC Switch.

Resource Allocation Timeout Value. The number of milliseconds the switch waits to allow two ports to allocate enough resources to establish a link. The default is 10000.

Error Detect Timeout Value. The number of milliseconds a port is to wait for errors to clear. The default is 2000.

The priority used in the FC-SW-2 principal switch selection algorithm. 1 is high, 255 is low. The default is 254.

Switch configuration description. The configuration description can be up to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is 2/8q FC Switch.

Propagates just the active zone set throughout the fabric (True, compliant) or the entire zoning database (False, non-compliant). The default is True. (not supported)

Available only when the InteropMode parameter is False, this parameter enables (True) or disables (False) the use of legacy address formatting for interoperating with non-FC-SW-2

switches. See Table 52

. The default is False. (not supported)


139


THRESHOLD

Initiates a configuration session by which to generate and log alarms for selected events. The system displays each event, its triggers, and sampling window one line at a time and prompts you for a value. For each parameter, enter a new value or press

Enter to accept the current value shown in brackets. These parameters must be saved

in a configuration and activated before they take effect. See the “ Config command ” on page 119 for information about saving and activating a configuration.

Table 53

describes the Set Config Threshold parameters. The switch shuts down a port if an alarm condition is not cleared within three consecutive sampling windows (by default

30 seconds). Reset the port to bring it back online. An alarm is cleared when the threshold monitoring detects that the error rate has fallen below the falling trigger.

Table 53: Set config threshold parameters

Parameter

Threshold Monitoring Enabled

CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled

DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled

LoginMonitoringEnabled

LogoutMonitoringEnabled

LOSMonitoringEnabled

Rising Trigger

Falling Trigger

Sample Window

Description

Master enable/disable parameter for all events.

Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation of all enabled event alarms. The default is False.

The event type enable/disable parameter. Enables

(True) or disables (False) the generation of alarms for each of the following events:

■

■

CRC errors

Decode errors

■

■

■

Device login errors

Device logout errors

Loss-of-signal errors

The event count above which a rising trigger alarm is logged. The switch will not generate another rising trigger alarm for that event until the count descends below the falling trigger and again exceeds the rising trigger.

The event count below which a falling trigger alarm is logged. The switch will not generate another falling trigger alarm for that event until the count exceeds the rising trigger and descends again below the falling trigger.

The period of time in seconds in which to count events.

140



ZONING

Initiates an editing session in which to change switch zoning attributes. The system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value. For each parameter, enter a new value or press Enter to accept the current value shown in brackets.

Table 54: Set config zoning parameters

Parameter

InteropAutoSave

Default Visibility

Description

Available only when the InteropMode parameter is True, this parameter enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of changes to active zone set in the switch’s permanent memory.

See “ Set config threshold parameters ” on page 140. The

default is True. (not supported)

Disabling the Autosave parameter can be useful to prevent the propagation of zoning information when experimenting with different zoning schemes. However, leaving the Autosave parameter disabled can disrupt device configurations should a switch have to be reset. For this reason, the Autosave parameter should be enabled in a production environment.

Enables (All) or disables (None) communication among the switch’s ports/devices and the fabric in the absence of an active zone set. The default is All.

Examples

The following is an example of the

SET CONFIG PORT command:



2/8q FC Switch (admin-config) #> set config port 1

A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.

Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.

If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list

press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.

Configuring Port Number: 1

------------------------

AdminState (1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics, 4=Down) [Online]

LinkSpeed (1=1Gb/s, 2=2Gb/s, 3=Auto) [Auto ]

PortType (GL / G / F / FL / Donor) [GL ]

SymPortName (string, max=32 chars) [Port1 ]

ALFairness (True / False) [False ]

DeviceScanEnable (True / False) [True ]

ForceOfflineRSCN (True / False) [False ]

ARB_FF (True / False) [False ]

InteropCredit (decimal value, 0-255) [0 ]


141


ExtCredit (dec value, increments of 15, non-loop only) [0 ]

FANEnable (True / False) [True ]

LCFEnable (True / False) [False ]

MFSEnable (True / False) [False ]

MSEnable (True / False) [True ]

NoClose (True / False) [False ]

IOStreamGuard (Enable / Disable) [Disable]

VIEnable (True / False) [False ]

PDISCPingEnable (True / False) [True ]

Finished configuring attributes.

This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and

activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.

To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.

2/8q FC Switch (admin-config) #>


SET CONFIG SWITCH

command:



2/8q FC Switch (admin-config) #> set config switch

A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow.




AdminState (1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics) [Online ]

BroadcastEnable (True / False) [False ]

InbandEnabled (True / False) [False ]

DefaultDomainID (decimal value, 1-239) [11 ]

DomainIDLock (True / False) [True ]

SymbolicName (string, max=32 chars) [2/8q FC Switch]

R_A_TOV (decimal value, 100-100000 msec) [10000 ]

E_D_TOV (decimal value, 10-20000 msec) [2000 ]

PrincipalPriority (decimal value, 1-255) [254 ]

ConfigDescription (string, max=32 chars) [

2/8q FC Switch

]

InteropMode (True / False) [True ]

142




SET CONFIG THRESHOLD

command:



2/8q FC Switch (admin-config) #> set config threshold



If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.

ThresholdMonitoringEnabled (True / False) [False ]

CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled (True / False) [True ]

RisingTrigger (decimal value, 1-1000) [25 ]

FallingTrigger (decimal value, 0-1000) [1 ]

SampleWindow (decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10 ]

DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled (True / False) [True ]




LoginMonitoringEnabled (True / False) [True ]




LogoutMonitoringEnabled (True / False) [True ]




LOSMonitoringEnabled (True / False) [True ]





This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.



143



SET CONFIG ZONING

command:



2/8q FC Switch (admin-config) #> set config zoning



If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.

InteropAutoSave (True / False) [True]

Default Visibility (All / None) [All ]


This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and

activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.


Set Log

Command

Specifies the events to record in the event log and display on the screen. You determine what events to record in the switch event log using the

Component

,

Level

, and

Port

keywords.

You determine what events are automatically displayed on the screen using the

Display keyword. Alarms are always displayed on the screen.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

SET LOG

Keywords

ARCHIVE

Collects the most recent 200 entries plus the previous 1000 entries and stores the result in new file named logfile

that is maintained in switch memory where it can be downloaded using FTP. To download logfile

, open an FTP session, log in with account name/password of images

for both, and type get logfile

.

CLEAR

Clears all log entries.

COMPONENT [filter_list]

Specifies one or more components given by [filter_list] to monitor for events. A component is a firmware module that is responsible for a particular portion of switch operation. Use a <space> to delimit values in the list. [filter_list] can be one or more of the following:

MGMTSERVER

—Monitors management server status.

NAMESERVER

—Monitors name server status.

144



PORT

—Monitors all port events.

SNMP

—Monitors SNMP events.

SWITCH

—Monitors switch management events.

ZONING

—Monitors zoning conflict events.

ALL

—Monitors all components.

NONE

—Monitor none of the component events.

DISPLAY [filter]

Specifies the log events to automatically display on the screen according to the event severity levels given by [filter]. [filter] can be one of the following values:

CRITICAL

—Critical severity level events. The critical level describes events that are generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but require no action.

WARN

—Warning severity level events. The warning level describes events that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but are more important than the informative level events.

INFO

—Informative severity level events. The informative level describes routine events associated with a normal fabric.

NONE

—Specifies no severity levels for display on the screen.

LEVEL [filter]

Specifies the severity level given by [filter] to use in monitoring and logging events for the specified components or ports. [filter] can be one of the following values:

CRITICAL

—Monitors critical events. The critical level describes events that are generally disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but require no action.

WARN

—Monitors warning and critical events. The warning level describes events that are generally not disruptive to the administration or operation of the fabric, but are more important than the informative level events.

INFO

—Monitors informative, warning, and critical events. The informative level describes routine events associated with a normal fabric. This is the default severity level.

NONE

—Monitors none of the severity levels.

PORT [port_list]

Specifies one or more ports to monitor for events. Choose one of the following values:

[ port_list

]—Specifies port or ports to monitor. Use a <space> to delimit values in the list. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.

ALL

—Specifies all ports.

NONE

—Disables monitoring on all ports.

RESTORE

Restores and saves the port, component, and level settings to the default values.


145


SAVE

Saves the log settings for the component, severity level, port, and display level. These settings remain in effect after a switch reset. The log settings can be viewed using the

Show Log Settings

command. To export log entries to a file, use the S et Log

Archive command.

START

Starts the logging of events based on the Port, Component, and Level keywords assigned to the current configuration. The logging continues until you enter the

Set

Log Stop

command.

STOP

Stops logging of events.

Notes

In addition to critical, warn, and informative severity levels, the highest event severity level is alarm. The alarm level describes events that are disruptive to the administration or operation of a fabric and require administrator intervention. Alarms are always logged and always displayed on the screen.

Set Port command

Sets port state and speed for the specified port temporarily until the next switch reset or new configuration activation. This command also clears port counters.

Authority

Admin, except for the

Clear

keyword

Syntax

SET PORT [PORT_NUMBER}

Keywords

[PORT_NUMBER]

Specifies the port. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.

BYPASS [ALPHA]

Sends a Loop Port Bypass (LPB) to a specific Arbitrated Loop Physical Address

(ALPA) or to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop. [alpa] can be a specific ALPA or the keyword ALL to choose all ALPAs.

CLEAR

Clears the counters on the port. This keyword does not require an admin session.

ENABLE

Sends a Loop Port Enable (LPE) to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop.

SPEED [TRANSMISSION_SPEED]

Specifies the transmission speed for the specified port. Choose one of the following port speed values:

2Gb/s

—Two gigabits per second.

Auto

—The port speed is automatically detected.

146



STATE [STATE]

Specifies one of the following administrative states for the specified port:

Online

—Places the port online. This activates and prepares the port to send data.

Offline

—Places the port offline. This prevents the port from receiving signal and accepting a device login.

Diagnostics

—Prepares the port for testing. This prepares the port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a device login.

Down

—Disables the port by removing power from the port lasers.

Set Setup

command

Changes SNMP and system configuration settings. The switch maintains one SNMP configuration and one system configuration.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

SET SETUP

Keywords

SNMP

Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change SNMP configuration settings.

Table 55 describes the SNMP parameters. For each parameter, enter a new value or

press Enter to accept the current value shown in brackets.

Table 55: SNMP configuration settings

Entry

SNMPEnabled

Contact

Location

Trap [1-5] Address

Trap [1-5] Port

Trap [1-5] Severity

Trap [1-5] Version

Trap [1-5] Enabled

Description

Enables (True) or disables (False) SNMP on the switch. The default is True.

Specifies the name of the person to be contacted to respond to trap events. The name can be up to 64 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is undefined.

Specifies the name of the switch location. The name can be up to 64 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,).

The default is undefined.

Specifies the workstation IP address to which SNMP traps are sent. The default address for trap 1 is 10.0.0.254. The default address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0. Addresses, other than

0.0.0.0, for all traps must be unique.

Specifies the workstation port to which SNMP traps are sent.

Valid workstation port numbers are 1–65535. The default is

162.

Specifies the severity level to use when monitoring trap events.

The default is Warning

Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) to use in formatting traps.

The default is 2.

Specifies whether traps (event information) are enabled or disabled (default).


147


Table 55: SNMP configuration settings (Continued)

Entry

ReadCommunity

WriteCommunity

TrapCommunity

AuthFailureTrap

ProxyEnabled

Description

Read community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to read information from the switch. This is a write-only field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same. The read community password can be up to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is “public”.

Write community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to write information to the switch. This is a write-only field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same. The write community password can be up to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is “private”.

Trap community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to receive traps. This is a write-only field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same. The trap community password can be up to 32 characters excluding #, semicolon (;), and comma (,). The default is

“public”.

Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation of traps in response to trap authentication failures. The default is False.

Enables (True) or disables (False) SNMP communication with other switches in the fabric. The default is True.

system

Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change system configuration settings.

Table 56 describes the system configuration parameters. For each parameter, enter a

new value or press Enter to accept the current value shown in brackets.

Note: Changing the IP address will terminate all Ethernet management sessions.

Table 56: System configuration settings

Entry

Eth0NetworkDiscovery

Eth0NetworkAddress

Eth0NetworkMask

Eth0GatewayAddress

AdminTimeout

LocalLogEnabled

RemoteLogEnabled

Description

Ethernet boot method: 1 - Static, 2 - Bootp, 3 - DHCP,

4 - RARP. The default is 1 - Static.

Ethernet Internet Protocol (IP) address. The default is 10.0.0.1.

Ethernet subnet mask address.

Ethernet IP address gateway.

Specifies the amount of time in minutes the switch waits before terminating an idle Admin session. Zero (0) disables the time out threshold. The default is 30, the maximum is 1440.

Enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of log information on the switch. The default is True.

Enables (True) or disables (False) the recording of the switch event log on a remote host that supports the syslog protocol.

The default is False.

148



Table 56: System configuration settings (Continued)

Entry

RemoteLogHostAddress

NTPClientEnabled

NTPServerAddress

The IP address of the host that will receive the switch event log information if remote logging is enabled. The default is

10.0.0.254.

Description

Enables (True) or disables (False) the Network Time Protocol

(NTP) client on the switch. This client enables the switch to synchronize its time with an NTP server. This feature supports

NTP version 4 and is compatible with version 3. An Ethernet connection to the server is required and you must first set an initial time and date on the switch. The synchronized time becomes effective immediately. The default is False.

The IP address of the NTP server from which the NTP client acquires the time and date. The default is 10.0.0.254.

Examples

The following is an example of the Set Setup SNMP command:


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> set setup snmp





Trap Severity Options

---------------------

unknown, emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notify, info, debug, mark

SNMPEnabled (True / False) [True ]

Contact (string, max=64 chars) [<sysContact undefined]

Location (string, max=64 chars) [sysLocation undefined]

Trap1Address (dot-notated IP Address) [10.20.71.15 ]

Trap1Port (decimal value) [162 ]

Trap1Severity (see allowed options above) [warning ]

Trap1Version (1 / 2) [2 ]

Trap1Enabled (True / False) [False ]

















149







ReadCommunity (string, max=32 chars) [public ]

WriteCommunity (string, max=32 chars) [private ]

TrapCommunity (string, max=32 chars) [public ]

AuthFailureTrap (True / False) [False ]

ProxyEnabled (True / False) [True ]

The following is an example of the Set Setup System command:

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> set setup system





Eth0NetworkDiscovery (1=Static, 2=Bootp, 3=Dhcp, 4=Rarp) [Static ]

Eth0NetworkAddress (dot-notated IP Address) [10.0.0.1 ]

Eth0NetworkMask (dot-notated IP Address) [255.255.255.0]

Eth0GatewayAddress (dot-notated IP Address) [10.0.0.254 ]

AdminTimeout (dec value 0-1440 minutes, 0=never) [30 ]

LocalLogEnabled (True / False) [True ]

RemoteLogEnabled (True / False) [False ]

RemoteLogHostAddress (dot-notated IP Address) [10.0.0.254 ]

NTPClientEnabled (True / False) [False ]

NTPServerAddress (dot-notated IP Address) [10.0.0.254 ]

Show

command

Displays fabric, switch, and port operational information.

Authority

None

Syntax

SHOW

Keywords about

Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the switch.

This keyword is equivalent to the

Version

keyword.

150


Command Line Interface alarm [option]

Displays the alarm log and session display setting. If you omit [option], the command displays the last 200 alarm entries. The alarm log is cleared when the switch is reset or power cycled. [option] has the following value: setting

—Displays the status of the parameter that controls the display of alarms in the session output stream. This parameter is set using the

Set Alarm

command.

broadcast

Displays the broadcast tree information and all ports that are currently transmitting and receiving broadcast frames.

chassis

Displays chassis component status and temperature.

config [option]

Displays switch, port, and zoning configuration attributes. See the “ Show Config command ” on page 160.

domains

Displays list of each domain and its worldwide name in the fabric.

donor

Displays list of current donor configuration for all ports.

fabric

Displays list of each domain, symbolic name, worldwide name, node IP address, and port IP address.

interface

Displays the status of the active network interfaces.

log [option]

Displays log entries. See the “ Show Log command ” on page 163. The log is cleared

when the switch is reset or power cycled.

lsdb

Displays Link State database information.

mem [count]

Displays information about memory activity for the number of seconds given by

[count]. If you omit [count], the value 1 is used. Displayed memory values are in 1K block units.

Note: This keyword will display memory activity updates until [count] is reached – it cannot be interrupted. Therefore, avoid using large values for [count].

ns [option]

Displays name server information for the specified [option]. If you omit [option], name server information for the local domain ID is displayed. [option] can have the following values: all

—Displays name server information for all switches and ports.

[ domain_id

]—Displays name server information for the switch given by

[domain_id]. [domain_id] is a switch domain ID.


151


[ port_id

]—Displays name server information for the port given by [port_id].

[port_id] is a port Fibre Channel address.

pagebreak

Displays the current pagebreak setting. The pagebreak setting limits the display of information to 20 lines (On) or allows the continuous display of information without a break (Off).

perf [option]

Displays performance information for all ports. See the “ Show Perf command ” on page 165.

port [port_number]

Displays operational information for the port given by [port_number]. Ports are numbered beginning with 0. If [port number] is omitted, information is displayed for all ports.

Table 57 describes the port parameters.

Table 57: Show Port parameters

AIinit

AIinitError

Bad Frames

ClassXFramesIn

ClassXFramesOut

ClassXWordsIn

ClassXWordsOut

ClassXToss

DecodeError

FBusy

Flowerrors

FReject

InvalidCRC

InvalidDestAddr

LIP_AL_PD_ALPS

LIP_F7_AL_PS

LIP_F8_AL_PS

LIP_F7_F7

LIP_F8_F7

Entry Description

Incremented each time the port begins AL initialization.

Number of times the port entered initialization and the initialization failed.

Number of frames that have framing errors.

Number of class x frames received by this port.

Number of class

x frames sent by this port.

Number of class

x words received by this port.

Number of class x words sent by this port.

Number of times an SOFi3 or SOFn3 frame is tossed from

TBUF.

Number of decode errors detected

Number of class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames generated by this port in response to incoming frames. This usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N_Port that is preventing delivery of this frame.

Received a frame when there were no available credits.

Number of frames from devices that were rejected.

Invalid CRC detected.

Invalid destination address detected.

Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific) resets, performed.

This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop. An L_Port, identified by

AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and is trying to restore the loop.

This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_Port identified by AL_PS.

A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire a valid

AL_PA.

A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a loop failure has been detected at the receiver.

152



Table 57: Show Port parameters (Continued)

Link Failures

Entry

Login

Logout

LoopTimeouts

LossOfSync

PrimSeqErrors

RxLinkResets

RxOfflineSeq

TotalErrors

TotalLIPsRecvd

TotalLIPsXmitd

TotalLinkResets

TotalOfflineSeq

TotalRxFrames

TotalRxWords

TotalTxFrames

TotalTxWords

TxLinkResets

TxOfflineSeq

Description

Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link failure is a loss of synchronization or a loss of signal while not in the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to attempt to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established, a link failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link failure.

Number of device logins

Number of device logouts

A two (2) second timeout as specified by FC-AL-2.

Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an invalid transmission word.

Primitive sequence errors detected.

Number of link reset primitives received from an attached device.

Number of offline sequences received. An OLS is issued for link initialization, a Receive & Recognize Not_Operational

(NOS) state, or to enter the offline state.

Total number of errors detected.

Number of loop initialization primitive frames received by this port.

Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted by this port.

Total number of link reset primitives.

Total number of Offline Sequences issued and received by this port.

Total number of frames received by this port.

Total number of words received by this port.

Total number of frames issued by this port.

Total number of words issued by this port.

Number of Link Resets issued by this port.

Total number of Offline Sequences issued by this port.

post log

Displays the Power On Self Test (POST) log which contains results from the POST.

setup [option]

Displays setup attributes for the system, SNMP, and the switch manufacturer. See the

“ Show Setup command ” on page 166.

steering [domain_id]

Displays the routes that data takes to the switch given by [domain_id]. If you omit

[domain_id], the system displays routes for all switches in the fabric.


153

Command Line Interface support

Executes a series of commands that display a complete description of the switch, its configuration, and operation. The display can be captured from the screen and used for diagnosing problems. This keyword is intended for use at the request of your HP

Authorized Service Provider. The commands that are executed include the following:

— Alias List

— Config List

— Date

— History

— Ps

— Show (About, Alarm, Backtrace, Chassis, Config Port,

Config Switch, Config Threshold, Dev, Dev Settings,

Domains, Donor, Fabric, Log, Log Archive, Log Settings,

Lsdb, Mem, Ns, Perf, Port, Setup Mfg, Setup Snmp, Setup

System, Steering, Switch, Topology, Users)

— Uptime

— User Accounts

— Whoami

— Zoneset (Active, List)

— Zoning (History, Limits, List) switch

Displays switch operational information.

topology

Displays all connected devices.

users

Displays a list of logged-in users. This is equivalent to the

User List

command.

version

Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the switch.

This keyword is equivalent to the

About

keyword.

Examples


Show Chassis

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show chassis

Chassis Information

-------------------

BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius 23

PowerSupplyStatus (1) Good

HeartBeatCode 1

HeartBeatStatus Normal

154




Show Domains command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show domains

Principal switch is (remote): 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c

Domain ID List:

Domain 97 (0x61) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:71:ed

Domain 98 (0x62) WWN = 10:00:00:60:df:22:2e:0c

Domain 99 (0x63) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:72:45

Domain 100 (0x64) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:ba:68

Domain 101 (0x65) WWN = 10:00:00:60:df:22:2e:06

Domain 102 (0x66) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:ef

Domain 103 (0x67) WWN = 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c

Domain 104 (0x68) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:b8:b7


Show Fabric

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show fabric

Domain WWN Enet IP Addr FC IP Addr SymbolicName

------ --- ------------ ---------- ------------

16 (0x10) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:77:81 10.20.68.11 0.0.0.0 gui sb1 .11

17 (0x11) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:6a:2d 10.20.68.12 0.0.0.0 sw12

18 (0x12) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:c3:04 10.20.68.160 0.0.0.0 sw .160

19 (0x13) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:bc:56 10.20.68.108 0.0.0.0 Sb2 .108


Show NS

[local domain] command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show ns

Seq Domain Port Port

No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodeWWN

--- ------ ------ ---- --- ------- -------

1 19 (0x13) 1301e1 NL 3 21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69 20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69

2 19 (0x13) 1301e2 NL 3 21:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b 20:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b

3 19 (0x13) 1301e4 NL 3 21:00:00:20:37:73:05:26 20:00:00:20:37:73:05:26

4 19 (0x13) 130d00 N 3 21:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc 20:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc


Show NS [domain_ID]

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show ns 18

Seq Domain Port Port

No ID ID Type COS PortWWN NodeWWN

--- ------ ------ ---- --- ------- -------

1 18 (0x12) 120700 N 3 21:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc 20:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc


155



Show NS [port_ID]

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show ns 1301e1

Port ID: 1301e1

--------

PortType NL

PortWWN 21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69

SymbolicPortName

NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69

SymbolicNodeName

NodeIPAddress 0.0.0.0

ClassOfService 3

PortIPAddress 0.0.0.0

FabricPortName 20:01:00:c0:dd:00:bc:56

FC4Type FCP

FC4Desc (NULL)


Show Interface

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show interface eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:DD:00:BD:ED

inet addr:10.20.68.107 Bcast:10.20.68.255 Mask:255.255.255.0

UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1

RX packets:4712 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:3000 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0

collisions:0 txqueuelen:100

RX bytes:415313 (405.5 Kb) TX bytes:716751 (699.9 Kb)

Interrupt:11 Base address:0xfcc0 lo Link encap:Local Loopback

inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0

UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1

RX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0

TX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0

collisions:0 txqueuelen:0

RX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb) TX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb)

156




Show Port

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show port 1

Port Number: 1

------------

AdminState Online PortID 150100

AsicNumber 0 PortWWN 20:01:00:c0:dd:00:bc:b8

AsicPort 1 RunningType Unknown

ConfigType G SFPPartNumber Unknown

DiagStatus Passed SFPRevision 0

EpConnState None SFPType NotInstalled

EpIsoReason NotApplicable SFPVendor Unknown

LinkSpeed 2Gb/s SFPVendorID 00000000

LinkState Inactive SymbolicName Port1

LoginStatus NotLoggedIn SyncStatus SyncLost

MaxCredit 16 XmitterEnabled True

OperationalState Offline

ALInit 0 LIP_F8_AL_PS 0

ALInitError 0 LIP_F8_F7 0

BadFrames 0 LinkFailures 26

Class2FramesIn 0 Login 25

Class2FramesOut 0 Logout 24

Class2WordsIn 0 LoopTimeouts 0

Class2WordsOut 0 LossOfSync 1

Class3FramesIn 0 PrimSeqErrors 0

Class3FramesOut 0 RxLinkResets 23

Class3Toss 0 RxOfflineSeq 45

Class3WordsIn 0 TotalErrors 26

Class3WordsOut 0 TotalLIPsRecvd 0

DecodeErrors 0 TotalLIPsXmitd 0

EpConnects 25 TotalLinkResets 77

FBusy 0 TotalOfflineSeq 59

FlowErrors 0 TotalRxFrames 0

FReject 0 TotalRxWords 0

InvalidCRC 0 TotalTxFrames 0

InvalidDestAddr 0 TotalTxWords 0

LIP_AL_PD_AL_PS 0 TxLinkResets 54

LIP_F7_AL_PS 0 TxOfflineSeq 14

LIP_F7_F7 0


157



Show Switch

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show switch

Switch Information

------------------

SymbolicName 2/8q FC Switch

SwitchWWN 10:00:00:c0:dd:03:cf:cc

SwitchType 2/8q FC Switch

BootVersion V1.1.0.6-0 (Tue Apr 27 13:31:56 2004)

CreditPool 0

DomainID 1 (0x1)

FirstPortAddress 110000

FlashSize - MBytes 64

LogFilterLevel Info

MaxPorts 8

NumberOfResets 2

ReasonForLastReset PowerUp

ActiveImageVersion - build date V04.0.3.4-0 (Thu Sep 2 18:41:02 2004)

PendingImageVersion - build date V4.0.3.4-0 (Thu Sep 2 18:41:02 2004)

ActiveConfiguration default

AdminState Online

AdminModeActive False

BeaconOnStatus False

OperationalState Online

PrincipalSwitchRole True

BoardTemp (1) - Degrees Celsius 29

SwitchDiagnosticsStatus Passed

SwitchTemperatureStatus Normal


Show Topology

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show topology

Unique ID Key

-------------

A = ALPA, D = Domain ID, P = Port ID

Port Local Local Remote Remote Unique

Number Type PortWWN Type NodeWWN ID

------ ----- ------- ------ ------- ------

5 F 20:05:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec N 20:00:00:00:c9:22:1e:93 010500 P

10 E 20:0a:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec E 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:80:21 4(0x4) D

158




Show Topology

command for port 1:

2/8q FC Switch #> show topology 1

Local Link Information

----------------------

PortNumber 1

PortID 650100

PortWWN 20:01:00:c0:dd:00:91:11

PortType F

Remote Link Information

-----------------------

Device 0

NodeWWN 50:80:02:00:00:06:d5:38

PortType NL

Description (NULL)

IPAddress 0.0.0.0

Device 1

NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:08:c9

PortType NL

Description (NULL)

IPAddress 0.0.0.0

Device 2

Description (NULL)

IPAddress 0.0.0.0

Device 3

NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:05:c9

PortType NL

Description (NULL)

IPAddress 0.0.0.0


159



Show Version

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show version

*****************************************************

* *

* Command Line Interface SHell (CLISH) *

* *

*****************************************************

SystemDescription HP StorageWorks

2/8q FC Switch

Eth0NetworkAddress 10.0.0.1 (use 'set setup system' to update)

MACAddress 00:c0:dd:03:cf:cc

WorldWideName 10:00:00:c0:dd:03:cf:cc

ChassisSerialNumber 0346A00032

SymbolicName 2/8q FC Switch

ActiveSWVersion V4.0.0.4-0

ActiveTimestamp Thu Sep 2 18:41:02 2004

DiagnosticsStatus Passed

Show Config

command

Displays switch, port, alarm threshold, and zoning for the current configuration.

Authority

None

Syntax

SHOW CONFIG

Keywords

PORT [port_number]

Displays configuration parameters for the port number given by [port_number]. Ports are numbered beginning with 0. If [port_number] is omitted, all ports are specified.

SWITCH

Displays configuration parameters for the switch.

THRESHOLD

Displays alarm threshold parameters for the switch.

AONING

Displays zoning configuration parameters for the switch.

Examples


Show Config Port command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show config port 3

Port Number: 3

------------

AdminState Offline

160


LinkSpeed Auto

PortType GL

SymbolicName Port3

ALFairness False

DeviceScanEnabled True

ForceOfflineRSCN False

ARB_FF False

InteropCredit 0

ExtCredit 0

FANEnabled True

LCFEnabled False

MFSEnabled True

MSEnabled True

NoClose False

IOStreamGuard Disabled

VIEnabled False

PDISCPingEnable True


Show Config Switch

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show config switch

Configuration Name: default

-------------------

Switch Configuration Information

--------------------------------

AdminState Online

BroadcastEnabled False

InbandEnabled True

DomainID 19 (0x13)

DomainIDLock True

SymbolicName sw108

R_A_TOV 10000

E_D_TOV 2000

PrincipalPriority 254

ConfigDescription

2/8q FC Switch

ConfigLastSavedBy admin@OB-session5

ConfigLastSavedOn day month date time year

InteropMode True

Legacy Address Format False

1


1. Appears only if FC-SW-2 Compliant is False.


161



Show Config Threshold

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show config threshold


------------

Threshold Configuration Information

-----------------------------------

ThresholdMonitoringEnabled False

CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled True

RisingTrigger 25

FallingTrigger 1

SampleWindow 10

DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True

RisingTrigger 25

FallingTrigger 0

SampleWindow 10

LoginMonitoringEnabled True

RisingTrigger 5

FallingTrigger 1

SampleWindow 10

LogoutMonitoringEnabled True

RisingTrigger 5

FallingTrigger 1

SampleWindow 10

LOSMonitoringEnabled True

RisingTrigger 100

FallingTrigger 5

SampleWindow 10


Show Config Zoning

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show config zoning


-------------------

Zoning Configuration Information

--------------------------------

InteropAutoSave True

Default Visibility All

162



Show Log

command

Displays the contents of the log or the parameters used to create and display entries in the log.

The log contains a maximum of 1200 entries. When the log reaches its entry capacity, subsequent entries overwrite the existing entries, beginning with the oldest.

Authority

None

Syntax

SHOW LOG

Keywords

[number of events]

Specifies the number of the most recent events to display from the event log. [number of events] must be a positive integer.

COMPONENTS

Displays the components currently being monitored for events. The components are as follows:

Mgmtserver

—Management server events

Nameserver

—Name server events

Port

—Port events

SNMP

—SNMP events.

Switch

—Switch management events.

Zoning

—Zoning conflict events.

DISPLAY [filter]

Displays log events on the screen according to the component or severity level filter given by [filter]. [filter] can be one of the following:

Info

—Displays all informative events.

Warning

—Displays all warning events.

Critical

—Displays all critical events.

Eport

—Displays all events related to E_Ports.

Mgmtserver

—Displays all events related to the management server.

Nameserver

—Displays all events related to the name server.

Port

[port_number]—Displays all events related to the port given by [port_number].

SNMP

—Displays all events related to SNMP.

Switch

—Displays all events related to switch management.

Zoning

—Displays all events related to zoning.

level

Displays the event severity level logging setting and the display level setting.

options


163


Displays the options that are available for configuring event logging and automatic

display to the screen. See the “ Set Log Command ” on page 144 for information about

how to configure event logging and display level.

port

Displays the ports being monitored for events. If an event occurs which is of the defined level and on a defined component, but not on a defined port, no entry is made in the log.

settings

Displays the current filter settings for component, severity level, port, and display level. This command is equivalent to executing the following commands separately:

Show Log Component

,

Show Log Level

, and

Show Log Port

.

Examples


Show Log Component

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show log component

Current settings for log

------------------------

FilterComponent NameServer MgmtServer Zoning Switch Blade Port Eport Snmp


Show Log Level

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show log level

Current settings for log

------------------------

FilterLevel Info

DisplayLevel Critical


Show Log Options

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show log options

Allowed options for log

-----------------------

FilterComponent

All,None,NameServer,MgmtServer,Zoning,Switch,Blade,Port,Eport,Snmp

FilterLevel Critical,Warn,Info,None

DisplayLevel Critical,Warn,Info,None


Show Log

command:

2/8q FC Switch

#> show log

[327][day month date time year][I][Eport Port:0/8][Eport State=

E_A0_GET_DOMAIN_ID]

[328][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][FSPF PortUp state=0]

[329][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending init hello]

[330][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Processing EFP, oxid= 0x8]

[331][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Eport State = E_A2_IDLE]

[332][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][EFP,WWN= 0x100000c0dd00b845,

len= 0x30]

164



[333][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending LSU oxid=0xc:type=1]

[334][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Send Zone Merge Request]

[335][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][LSDB Xchg timer set]

[336][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Setting attribute

Oper.UserPort.0.8.EpConnState Connected]

Show Perf

command

Displays port performance in frames/second and bytes/second. If you omit the keyword, the command displays data transmitted (out), data received (in), and total data transmitted and received in frames/second and bytes per second.

Authority

None

Syntax

SHOW PERF

Keywords

BYTE

Displays continuous performance data in total bytes/second transmitted and received for all ports. Enter q

to stop the display.

INBYTE

Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second received for all ports. Type q and press Enter to stop the display.

OUTBYTE

Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second transmitted for all ports. Enter q


FRAME

Displays continuous performance data in total frames/second transmitted and received for all ports. Enter q


INFRAME

Displays continuous performance data in frames/second received for all ports. Enter q to stop the display.

OUTFRAME

Displays continuous performance data in frames/second transmitted for all ports.

Enter q


ERRORS

Displays continuous error counts for all ports. Enter q



165


Examples


Show Perf

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show perf

Port Bytes/s Bytes/s Bytes/s Frames/s Frames/s Frames/s

Number (in) (out) (total) (in) (out) (total)

------ ------- ------- ------- -------- -------- --------

0 7K 136M 136M 245 68K 68K

1 58K 0 58K 1K 0 1K

2 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 0 7K 7K 0 245 245

7 136M 58K 136M 68K 1K 70K


Show Perf Byte

command:

2/8q FC Switch $> show perf byte

Displaying bytes/sec data... (Press 'q' and the ENTER key to stop display)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

76M 0 0 32M 0 0 0 43M

78M 0 0 34M 0 0 0 43M

78M 0 0 34M 0 0 0 43M

77M 0 0 33M 0 0 0 44M

77M 0 0 33M 0 0 0 44M

84M 0 0 40M 0 0 0 43M

83M 0 0 39M 0 0 0 43M

80M 0 0 35M 0 0 0 45M

77M 0 0 33M 0 0 0 44M

78M 0 0 33M 0 0 0 44M

75M 0 0 29M 0 0 0 45M

74M 0 0 28M 0 0 0 46M q

Show Setup

command

Displays the current SNMP and system settings.

Authority

None

Syntax

SHOW SETUP

166



Keywords

MFG

Displays manufacturing information about the switch.

SNMP

Displays the current SNMP settings.

SYSTEM

Displays the current system settings.

Examples


Show Setup Mfg

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show setup mfg

Manufacturing Information

-------------------------

BrandName HP

BuildDate Thursday, September 16, 2004 12:09

ChassisSerialNumber

CPUBoardSerialNumber

0346A00032

0346A00032

MACAddress 00:c0:dd:03:cf:cc

PlanarPartNumber 310077-00 A

SwitchSymbolicName 2/8q FC Switch

SwitchWWN 10:00:00:c0:dd:03:cf:cc

SystemDescription HP StorageWorks

2/8q FC Switch

SystemObjectID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.31


Show Setup SNMP

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show setup snmp

SNMP Information

----------------

SNMPEnabled True

Contact <sysContact undefined>

Location N_107 System Test Lab

Description

2/8q FC Switch

Trap1Address 10.0.0.254

Trap1Port 162

Trap1Severity warning

Trap1Version 2


167


Trap1Enabled False


Trap2Port 162


Trap2Version 2

Trap2Enabled False


Trap3Port 162


Trap3Version 2

Trap3Enabled False


Trap4Port 162


Trap4Version 2

Trap4Enabled False


Trap5Port 162


Trap5Version 2

Trap5Enabled False

ObjectID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.31

AuthFailureTrap True

ProxyEnabled True


Show Setup System

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> show setup system

System Information

------------------

Eth0NetworkDiscovery Static

Eth0NetworkAddress 10.20.11.32

Eth0NetworkMask 255.255.252.0

Eth0GatewayAddress 10.20.8.254

AdminTimeout 30

LocalLogEnabled True

RemoteLogEnabled False

RemoteLogHostAddress 10.0.0.254

NTPClientEnabled False

NTPServerAddress 10.0.0.254

168



Shutdown

command

Terminates all data transfers on the switch at convenient points and closes the Telnet session.

Always power cycle the switch after entering this command.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

SHUTDOWN

Notes

Always use this command to perform an orderly shut down before removing power from the switch.

When the shutdown is complete, the Heartbeat LED is extinguished.

Test

command

Tests ports using internal (SerDes level), external (transceiver), and online loopback tests.

Internal and external tests require that the port be placed in diagnostic mode. See the “ Set command ” on page 135 for information about changing the port administrative state. While

the test is running, the remaining ports on the switch remain fully operational.

Authority

Admin

Syntax

TEST

Keywords

PORT [port_number] [test_type]

Tests the port given by [port_number] using the test given by [test_type]. If you omit

[test_type], Internal is used. [test_type] can have the following values: internal

—Tests the SerDes. This is the default. The port must be in diagnostics mode to perform this test.

external

—Tests both the SerDes and transceiver. The port must be in diagnostics mode to perform this test, and a loopback plug must be installed in the transceiver.

online

—Tests communications between the port and its device node or device loop.

The port being tested must be online and connected to a remote device. The port passes if the test frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the frame that is received.

This test does not disrupt communication on the port.

CANCEL

—Cancels the online test in progress.

STATUS

—Displays the status of a test in progress, or if there is no test in progress, the status of the test that was executed last.

Examples

To run an internal or external port test:

1. To start an admin session, enter the following command: admin start


169


2. Place the port in Diagnostics mode by entering the following command (x = port number): set port x state diagnostics

3. Choose the type of port loopback test to run:

■

To run an internal loopback test, enter the following:

■ test port x internal

To run an external loopback test, enter the following command. A loopback plug must be installed for this test to pass. test port x external

4. A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press Enter to accept each default parameter value, or enter a new value for each parameter. The TestLength parameter is the number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases) parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern parameter is the pattern in the payload.

5. After the test type has been chosen and the command executed, a message on the screen will appear detailing the test results.

6. After the test is run, put the port back into online state by entering the following command

(x = port number). set port x state online

7. To verify port is back online, enter the following command. The contents of the

AdminState box should display Online.

show port x

8. The online loopback (node-to-node) test requires that port be online and connected to a remote device. To run the online loopback test:

9. To start an admin session, enter the following command.

admin start

10. To run the online loopback test, enter the following command. test port x online

11. A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press Enter to accept each default parameter value, or enter a new value for each parameter. The TestLength parameter is the number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases) parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern parameter is the pattern in the payload.

Before running the test, make sure that the device attached to the port can handle the test parameters.

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> test port x online

A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow. Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value. If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.

TestLength (decimal value, 1-4294967295) [100 ]

FrameSize (decimal value, 36-2148) [256 ]

DataPattern (32-bit hex value or 'Default') [Default]

StopOnError (True/False) [False ]

Do you want to start the test? (y/n) [n]

12. After all parameter values are defined, press Y to start the test. After the command executes, a message on the screen appears detailing the test results.

170



Uptime

command

Displays the elapsed up time since the switch was last reset and reset method. A hot reset or non-disruptive firmware activation does not reset the elapsed up time reported by this command.

Authority

None

Syntax

UPTIME

Examples

2/8q FC Switch #> uptime

Elapsed up time : 0 day(s), 2 hour(s), 28 min(s), 44 sec(s)

Reason last reset: NormalReset

User

command

Administers and displays user accounts.

Authority

Admin, except for the List option.

Syntax

USER

Keywords

ACCOUNTS

Displays all user accounts that exist on the switch. This keyword is available to all account names without an Admin session.

ADD

Add a user account to the switch. You will be prompted for an account name, a password, authority, and an expiration date.

— A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts.

— Account names are limited to 15 characters; passwords must be 4–20 characters.

— Admin authority grants permission to use the Admin command to open an admin session, from which all commands can be entered. Without Admin authority, you are limited to view-only commands.

— The expiration date is expressed in the number of days until the account expires

(2000 maximum). The switch will issue an expiration alarm every day for seven days prior to expiration. 0 (zero) specifies that the account has no expiration date.

DELETE [account_name]

Deletes the account name given by [account_name] from the switch.


171


EDIT

Initiates an edit session that prompts you for the account name for which to change the expiration date and authority.

LIST

Displays the list of users currently logged in and their session numbers. Provides the same function as the

Show Users

command. This keyword is available to all account names without an Admin session.

Examples


User Accounts command:

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> user accounts

Current list of user accounts

-----------------------------

images (admin authority = False, never expires)

admin (admin authority = True , never expires)

chuckca (admin authority = False, expires in < 50 days)

gregj (admin authority = True , expires in < 100 days)

fred (admin authority = True , never expires)


User Add command:

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> user add


account name (1-15 chars) : user1 account password (4-20 chars) : ******* please confirm account password: ******* set account expiration in days (0-2000, 0=never): [0] 100 should this account have admin authority? (y/n): [n] y

OK to add user account 'user1' with admin authority and to expire in 100 days?


172




User Edit

command:

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> user edit


account name (1-15 chars) : user1

set account expiration in days (0-2000, 0=never): [0]

should this account have admin authority? (y/n): [n]

OK to modify user account 'user1' with no admin authority

and to expire in 0 days?

Please confirm (y/n): [n]


User Delete

command:

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> user del user3

The user account will be deleted. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y


User List command:

2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> user list

User Ethernet Addr-Port Logged in Since

---- ------------------ ---------------

admin@OB-session1 10.20.68.108-1031 day month date time year

admin@OB-session2 10.20.68.108-1034 day month date time year

snmp@OB-session3 Unknown day month date time year

snmp@IB-session4 Unknown day month date time year

admin@OB-session5 Unknown day month date time year

Whoami

command

Displays the account name, session number, and switch domain ID for the Telnet session.

Authority

None

Syntx

WHOAMI

Examples

2/8q FC Switch #> whoami

User name : admin@session2

Switch name : 2/8q FC Switch

Switch domain ID: 21 (0x15)


173


Zone

Command

Manages zones and zone membership on a switch.

Authority

Admin and a Zoning Edit. See the “ Zoning command ” on page 178 for information about

starting a Zoning Edit session. The

List

,

Members

, and

Zonesets

keywords are available without an Admin session.

Syntax

ZONE

Keywords

ADD [zone] [member_list]

Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [members] to add to the zone named

[zone]. Use a <space> to delimit aliases and ports/devices in [member_list]. A zone can have a maximum of 2000 members. [member_list] can have any of the following formats:


1-239; port numbers can be 0-255.


— 16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.

— Alias name

The application verifies that the [members] format is correct, but does not validate that such a member exists.

COPY [zone_source] [zone_destination]

Creates a new zone named [zone_destination] and copies the membership into it from the zone given by [zone_source].

CREATE [zone]

Creates a zone with the name given by [zone]. An zone name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -.

The zoning database supports a maximum of 1000 zones.

DELETE [zone]

Deletes the specified zone given by [zone] from the zoning database. If the zone is a component of the active zone set, the zone will not be removed from the active zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.

LIST

Displays a list of all zones and the zone sets of which they are components. This keyword does not require an Admin session.

MEMBERS [zone]

Displays all members of the zone given by [zone]. This keyword does not require an

Admin session.

174



REMOVE [zone] [member_list]

Removes the ports/devices given by [member_list] from the zone given by [zone].

Use a <space> to delimit aliases and ports/devices in [member_list]. [member_list] can have any of the following formats:


1-239; port numbers can be 0-255.


— 16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.

— Alias name

RENAME [zone_old] [zone_new]

Renames the zone given by [zone_old] to the zone given by [zone_new].

TYPE [zone] [zone_type]

Specifies the zone type given by [zone_type] to be assigned to the zone name given by

[zone]. If you omit the [zone_type], the system displays the zone type for the zone given by [zone]. [zone_type] can be one of the following: soft

—name server zone hardACL

—Access control list hard zone. This keyword is case sensitive.

ZONESETS [zone]

Displays all zone sets of which the zone given by [zone] is a component. This keyword does not require an Admin session.

Examples


Zone List

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zone list

Zone ZoneSet

-------------------

wwn_b0241f

zone_set_1

wwn_23bd31

zone_set_1

wwn_221416

zone_set_1

wwn_2215c3

zone_set_1

wwn_0160ed

zone_set_1


175


wwn_c001b0

zone_set_1

wwn_401248

zone_set_1

wwn_02402f

zone_set_1

wwn_22412f

zone_set_1


Zone Members

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zone members wwn_b0241f

Current List of Members for Zone: wwn_b0241f

---------------------------------

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f


Zone Zonesets

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zone zonesets zone1

Current List of ZoneSets for Zone: zone1

----------------------------------

zone_set_1

Zoneset

command

Manages zone sets and component zones across the fabric.

Authority

Admin and Zoning Edit. See the “ Zoning command ” on page 178 for information about

starting a Zoning Edit session. The

Active

,

List

, and

Zones

keywords are available without an Admin session. You must close the Zoning Edit session before using the

Activate

and

Deactivate

keywords.

Syntx

ZONESET

Keywords

ACTIVATE [zone_set]

Activates the zone set given by [zone_set]. This keyword deactivates the active zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword.

176



ACTIVE

Displays the name of the active zone set. This keyword does not require Admin session.

ADD[zone_set] [zone_list]

Adds a list of zones and aliases given by [zone_list] to the zone set given by

[zone_set]. Use a <space> to delimit zone and alias names in [zone_list].

COPY [zone_set_source] [zone_set_destination]

Creates a new zone set named [zone_set_destination] and copies into it the zones from the zone set given by [zone_set_source].

CREATE [zone_set]

Creates the zone set with the name given by [zone_set]. A zone set name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _,

$, ^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 zone sets.

DEACTIVATE

Deactivates the active zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword.

DELETE[zone_set]

Deletes the zone set given by [zone_set]. If the specified zone set is active, the command is suspended until the zone set is deactivated.

LIST

Displays a list of all zone sets. This keyword does not require an Admin session.

REMOVE[zone_set] [zone_list]

Removes a list of zones given by [zone_list] from the zone set given by [zone_set].

Use a <space> to delimit zone names in [zone_list]. If [zone_set] is the active zone set, the zone will not be removed until the zone set has been deactivated.

RENAME [zone_set_old] [zone_set_new]

Renames the zone set given by [zone_set_old] to the name given by [zone_set_new].

You can rename the active zone set.

ZONES [zone_set]

Displays all zones that are components of the zone set given by [zone_set]. This keyword does not require an Admin session.

Notes

■

■

■

A zone set must be active for its definitions to be applied to the fabric.

Only one zone set can be active at one time.

A zone can be a component of more than one zone set.

Examples


Zoneset Active

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zoneset active

ActiveZoneSet Bets

LastActivatedBy admin@OB-session6

LastActivatedOn day month date time year


177



Zoneset List command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zoneset list

Current List of ZoneSets

------------------------

alpha

beta


Zoneset Zones

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zoneset zones ssss

Current List of Zones for ZoneSet: ssss

----------------------------------

zone1

zone2

zone3

Zoning

command

Opens a Zoning Edit session in which to create and manage zone sets and zones. See the

“ Zoning command

” on page 178 and the “ Zoneset command ” on page 176.

Authority

Admin, except for the

Active

,

History

,

Limits

, and

List

keywords.

Syntax

ZONING

Keywords

ACTIVE

Displays information for the active zone set including component zones and zone members. This keyword does not require an Admin session.

CANCEL

Closes the current Zoning Edit session. Any unsaved changes are lost.

CLEAR

Clears all inactive zone sets from the volatile edit copy of the zoning database. This keyword does not affect the non-volatile zoning database. However, if you enter the

Zoning Clear

command followed by the

Zoning Save

command, the non-volatile zoning database is cleared from the switch.

Note: The preferred method for clearing the zoning database from the switch is the

Reset

Zoning

command.

EDIT

Opens a Zoning Edit session.

178



HISTORY

Displays a history of zoning modifications. This keyword does not require an Admin session. History information includes the following:

— Time of the most recent zone set activation or deactivation and the user who performed it

— Time of the most recent modifications to the zoning database and the user who made them.

— Checksum for the zoning database

LIMITS

Displays the number of zone sets, zones, aliases, members per zone, members per alias, and total members in the zoning database. This keyword also displays the switch zoning database limits, excluding the active zone set, which are described in

Table 58 .

This keyword does not require an Admin session.

Table 58: Zoning limits

MaxZoneSets

MaxZones

MaxAliases

MaxTotalMembers

MaxZonesInZoneSets

MaxMembersPerZone

MaxMembersPerAlias

Limit Description

Maximum number of zone sets (256).

Maximum number of zones (256).

Maximum number of aliases (256).

Maximum number of zone and alias members

(2000) that can be stored in the switch’s zoning database.

Maximum number of zones that are components of zone sets (1000), excluding the orphan zone set, that can be stored in the switch’s zoning database. Each instance of a zone in a zone set counts toward this maximum.

Maximum number of members in a zone

(2000) that can be stored in the switch’s zoning database.

Maximum number of members in all zones and aliases (2000)

LIST

Lists all fabric zoning definitions. This keyword does not require an Admin session.

RESTORE

Reverts the changes to the zoning database that have been made during the current

Zoning Edit session since the last

Zoning Save

command was entered.

SAVE

Saves changes made during the current Zoning Edit session. The system will inform you that the zone set must be activated to implement any changes. This does not apply if you entered the

Zoning Clear

command during the Zoning Edit session.


179


Examples


Zoning Edit

command:


2/8q FC Switch (admin) #> zoning edit

2/8q FC Switch (admin-zoning) #>

.

.

2/8q FC Switch (admin-zoning) #> zoning cancel

Zoning edit mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y



Zoning Limits command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zoning limits

Zoning Attribute Maximum Current [Name]

---------------- ------- ------- ------

MaxZoneSets 256 6

MaxZones 256 19

MaxAliases 256 1

MaxTotalMembers 2000 149

MaxZonesInZoneSets 1000 15

MaxMembersPerZone 2000

10 D_1_JBOD_1

23 D_1_Photons

9 D_2_JBOD1

16 D_2_NewJBOD_2

5 E1JBOD1

5 E2JBOD2

3 LinkResetZone

3 LinkResetZone2

8 NewJBOD1

8 NewJBOD2

12 Q_1Photon1

12 Q_2Photon2

8 Q_1_NewJBOD1

13 Q_1_Photon_1

180


13 Q_2_Photon_2

MaxMembersPerAlias 2000

2 AliasInAZone


Zoning List

command:

2/8q FC Switch #> zoning list

Active ZoneSet Information

ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember

--------------------------------

wwn

wwn_b0241f

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f

wwn_23bd31

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31

wwn_221416

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

10:00:00:00:c9:22:14:16

wwn_2215c3

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

10:00:00:00:c9:22:15:c3

Configured Zoning Information

ZoneSet Zone ZoneMember

--------------------------------

wwn

wwn_b0241f

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f



181


wwn_23bd31

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31

wwn_221416

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

10:00:00:00:c9:22:14:16

wwn_2215c3

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2

50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2

10:00:00:00:c9:22:15:

182


Index

A

access control list zone

46 ,

56

account name 37

,

112

,

173

display

173

active zone set

44 ,

46 ,

71

Active Zoneset data window 44

Admin account name

116

authority

116

Admin command 117

administrative state

configured 70 ,

86

current

70 ,

86 port 86 ,

147

switch 70 ,

136

alarm

configuration 66 ,

140

configuration display

160

log

135 ,

151

alias

add members 57 ,

118

copy

118

create 57 ,

118

delete 119 delete members 119

description 46

display list

119

display members

119

remove 57

rename 119

Alias command

118

Arbitrated Loop Physical Address

146

archive configuration

75

audience

14

authentication trap

74

authority

116

authorized reseller, HP

18

auto save


default fabric view file 24

graphing options

93

zoning configuration

48

B

beacon

135

BootP boot method

73

broadcast

70

,

151

browser location

24

,

93

C

chassis status

151


111

command syntax

116 commands 116

Config command

119

configuration activate

119

archive 75

backup 119

copy

120 delete 120

edit

120

list

120

reset

132

restore 75 ,

120 save 120

configured administrative state

70

contact

73

conventions

document 15

equipment symbols

16

text symbols 15

CRC error

66


122

credits

88

current administrative state

70

183

Index

D

data window

Active Zoneset

44

Configured Zonesets

65

description 31 ,

32

,

34

Name Server 63

port information

84

port statistics 82

switch 63

database fabric

36

zoning 49

date 68

Date command

123

Decode error

66

default

configuration 77

visibility

48 ,

52

zoning 48

default fabric view file auto save

24

Switch Manager

24

device scan 87

distance 88

document conventions

15

related documentation 14

domain ID

description 70

display

151

lock

70

donor port

81

,

87

,

151

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

73

E

E_Port isolation 70

equipment symbols

16

Error Detect Timeout

71

event browser filter

43

preference

24

sort

43

event logging by component

144

,

163

by port

145

,

164

by severity level

163

display

163

restore defaults 145

save settings

146

settings

164

severity level 145

start 146

stop

146

184 external test

89

,

169

F

F_Port

81

,

87

fabric

add 36

add a switch

38

database

36

delete 37

discovery interval

24

displaying information 40

loop port

81

, 87

management 35

port 81

,

87

rediscovery 38

services

36

status

40

tree

29

zoning 45

fabric services 36

Fabric View arrange graphs

94

customize graphs

94

display graphs

94

preferences

93

start

91

fabric view file 92

auto save

93

open

37

password

92

save 38

faceplate display data window

34

description 25 ,

33

open

33

factory defaults

77

,

132

FC-4 descriptor

87

File Transfer Protocol 128

firmware image file

78 ,

127

install with Switch Manager 78

installation

123

list image files

127

non-disruptive activation 78

,

126

,

127

remove image files

127

retrieve image file

127

unpack image

127

version 154

Firmware Install command 123

FL_Port

81

,

87

G

gateway address 73


Index generic

port 81 ,

87

generic port

81

,

87

getting help

18

graphic window 30

H

hard reset 68

Hardreset command

124

help

25

Help command

125

help, obtaining 17

History command

126

Hotreset command 126

HP

authorized reseller 18

storage web site

18

technical support

18

I

I/O Steam Guard

87

Image command 127

in-band management 71

Initial Start Dialog 24

internal

test 169

internal test

89

Interop mode 71

IP address

73

configuration 72

L

layout

33

legacy address format

71

link delete

39

selecting 32

status

32

Link data window

64

link state database 151

Lip command 129

log archive

144

clear

144 event 144 ,

163

power-on self test

153

logged in users

154

loop port bypass

146

enable

146

fabric

81

,

87

initialization 129


loopback test

89

loss of signal monitoring

66

M

management workstation 20

manufacturer information

167

media status

81

memory activity

151

menu

33

menu structure

26

messages

97

N

name server display

151

export 67

zone 46

Name Server data window 63

network configuration reset

132

discovery

73

interfaces

151

properties

72

Network Time Protocol client

149

server

149

node-to-node test

89

non-disruptive activation

78 ,

126

O

online

help 25

test

89

online test

169

orphan zone set

46

P

page break

136

Passwd command 129

password

change 129

default fabric file

93

default fabric view file 23

switch

37 ,

129

user account 60 ,

112

performance graphs 94

Ping command 130

port

administrative state 86 ,

147

buffer credits 87 ,

88

configuration

85 ,

137

configuration display 160

185

Index counters

146

displaying information

80

external test

169

initialize 132

internal test 169

loopback test

169

mode 81

online test 169

operational information

152

operational state

81

performance

91

, 152

, 165

reset 89

selecting 34

speed

81 ,

86 ,

146

status

33

test 89

view

24 ,

33


65

,

84

Port Statistics data window 64 ,

82

port/device tree

50

power on self test log

153

preferences

Fabric View

93

Switch Manager

24

principal switch 70

properties network

72

port 85

Ps command

130

Q

Quit command 131

R

read community

73

receive buffer

87

refresh 40 ,

62

Registered State Control Notification 87

related documentation 14

remote logging 74

reset with POST

68

without POST

68

Reset command

131

Resource Allocation Timeout

71

restore configuration

75

Reverse Address Resolution Protocol

73

S

scan device 87

SerDes level test

89

Set command

135

186

Set Config command

137

Set Log command 144

Set Port command

146

Set Setup command

147

SFP level test

89

Show command 150

Show Config command

160

Show Log command

163

Show Perf command

165

Show Setup command

166

Shutdown command

169

Simple Network Management Protocol configuration

73 ,

147


proxy

73

reset

132

trap configuration

74

SNMP enabled 73

soft zone

46

,

56

static boot method

73

status icon color 30

steering

153

subnet mask address

73

switch

add 38

administrative state 70 ,

136

configuration

68 ,

139


delete 39

displaying information 62

hard reset

68

, 124

icons

40

location

74

manufacturer information 167

operational information

154

paging

67

properties

69

replace

39

reset

171

reset without POST 68 ,

132

restore factory defaults

77

selecting

32

status

32

Switch data window

63

Switch Manager default fabric file

22 exit 22

preferences

24

, 93

uninstall

23

user interface

25 version 25

Switch Manager installation

Linux

21

Windows

20


Index

symbolic name 69

symbols in text

15

symbols on equipment

16

syslog 74

system configuration

change 148

display

167

T

technical support, HP 18

temperature 151

Test command

169

testing ports 89

text symbols

15

time

68 ,

123

timeout values

71

tool bar standard

29

zoning 50

topology display arrange icons

32 data windows 32

description 25

usage

31

transceiver status

81

transmission speed

86

trap

authentication 74

community

73

configuration 74

SNMP version

74

U

Uptime command

171

user account

112

logged in 154

user account

create 59

modify

61

password

60

remove 59

security 35

User command

171

V

version

25

W

warning

symbols on equipment 16

web sites

HP storage 18


Whoami command

173

working directory

24

,

93

status indicator

31

write community 74

Z

zone access control list

46

add member port

55 ,

174

copy

53

,

174

create

54 ,

174

definition

45

delete 174

delete member port

175

list

174 list members 174

name server

46

remove 53 ,

56

remove all

56

remove member port

55

rename

55 ,

175

soft

46

type 56 ,

175

Zone command 174

zone merge failure recovery

49

zone set activate

52

active

44

, 46 ,

178

add member zone

177

create

52 ,

177

deactivate 52 ,

132 ,

177

definition

46

delete 177

delete member zone

53

,

177

display

177

display active

177

display members

177

display zones

175

management 52

orphan

46

remove 53

rename

55 ,

177

tree

50

Zoneset command

176

zoning configuration

48 ,

141


database

46

,

49

,

71

,

132

default 48

edit

178

history 179

limits

179

187

Index list definitions

179

remove all 53

revert changes

179 save edits 179

Zoning command

178

188
